Patent Application
20110135650
The invention relates to novel compounds of the Formula (I) having antithrombotic activity which, in particular, inhibit blood clotting factor IXa, to processes for their preparation and to use thereof as medicaments.
Factor IXa is a plasma serine protease involved in the regulation of blood coagulation. While blood coagulation is a necessary and important part of the regulation of an organism's homeostasis, abnormal blood coagulation can also have deleterious effects. For instance, thrombosis is the formation or presence of a blood clot inside a blood vessel or cavity of the heart. Such a blood clot can lodge in a blood vessel blocking circulation and inducing a heart attack or stroke. Thromboembolic disorders are the largest cause of mortality and disability in the industrialized world.
Blood clotting is a process of control of the blood stream essential for the survival of mammals. The process of clotting, as shown in the Patent Document 1, and the subsequent dissolution of the clot after wound healing has taken place commences after vascular damage and can be divided into four phases:
1. The phase of vasoconstriction or vasocontraction: By means of this the blood loss in the damaged area is decreased.
2. The next phase is platelet activation by thrombin. The platelets attach to the site of the vessel wall damage and form a platelet aggregate. The protein fibrinogen is responsible here for the crosslinkage of the platelets by means of appropriate surface receptors. Platelets also bind to exposed collagen of the extracellular matrix of the damaged vessel wall and are activated by this means. After activation of the platelets, a number of messenger substances are secreted, which induce the activation of further platelets. At the same time, a membrane lipid, phosphatidylserine, is transported from the inside of the membrane of the platelets to the outside, on which complexes of clotting factors can accumulate. The platelets accelerate blood clotting by means of this mechanism.
3. The formation of these clotting complexes leads to the massive formation of thrombin, which converts soluble fibrinogen to fibrin by cleavage of two small peptides. Fibrin monomers spontaneously form threadlike strands, from which, after crosslinkage by clotting factor XIII, a stable protein network forms. The initially even looser platelet aggregate is stabilized by this fibrin network; platelet aggregates and fibrin network are the two essential constituents of a thrombus.
4. After wound healing, the thrombus is dissolved by the action of the key enzyme of the endogenous fibrinolysis system, plasmin.
Two alternative pathways can lead to the formation of a fibrin clot, the intrinsic and the extrinsic pathway. These pathways are initiated by different mechanisms, but in the later phase they converge to give a common final path of the clotting cascade. In this final path of clotting, clotting factor X is activated. The activated factor X is responsible for the formation of thrombin from the inactive precursor prothrombin circulating in the blood. The formation of a thrombus on the bottom of a vessel wall abnormality without a wound is the result of the intrinsic pathway. Fibrin clot formation as a response to tissue damage or an injury is the result of the extrinsic pathway. Both pathways comprise a relatively large number of proteins, which are known as clotting factors.
The intrinsic pathway requires the clotting factors V, VIII, IX, X, XI and XII and also prekallikrein, high molecular weight kininogen, calcium ions and phospholipids from platelets.
The intrinsic pathway is initiated when prekallikrein, high molecular weight kininogen factor XI and XII bind to a negatively charged surface. This point in time is designated as the contact phase. Exposure to vessel wall collagen is the primary stimulus of the contact phase. The result of the processes of the contact phase is the conversion of prekallikrein to kallikrein, which in turn activates factor XII. Factor XIIa hydrolyzes further prekallikrein to kallikrein, such that activation is the result. With increasing activation of factor XII, activation of factor XI occurs, which leads to a release of bradykinin, a vasodilator. As a result, the ending of the initial phase of vasoconstriction occurs. Bradykinin is formed from high molecular weight kininogen. In the presence of Ca2+ ions, factor XIa activates factor IX. Factor IX is a proenzyme, which contains vitamin K-dependent, γ-carboxyglutamic acid (GLA) residues. The serine protease activity becomes noticeable after binding of Ca2+ to these GLA residues. A number of the serine proteases of the blood clotting cascade (factors II, VII, IX and X) contain such vitamin K-dependent GLA residues. Factor IXa cleaves factor X and leads to activation to factor Xa. The prerequisite for the formation of factor IXa is the formation of a tenase complex from Ca2+ and the factors VIIIa, IXa and X on the surface of activated platelets. One of the reactions of activated platelets is the presentation of phosphatidylserine and phosphatidylinositol along the surfaces. The exposure of these phospholipids first makes the formation of the tenase complex possible. Factor VIII in this process has the function of a receptor for the factors IXa and X. Factor VIII is therefore a cofactor in the clotting cascade. The activation of factor VIII with formation of factor VIIIa, the actual receptor, needs only a minimal amount of thrombin. With increase in the concentration of thrombin, factor VIIIa is finally cleaved further and inactivated by thrombin. This dual activity of thrombin in relation to factor VIII leads to a self-restriction of tenase complex formation and thus to a limitation of blood clotting.
The extrinsic pathway requires a tissue factor (TF) and clotting factors V, VII, VIII, IX and X. In the case of a vessel injury, the tissue factor (TF) accumulates with the clotting factor VII and the latter is activated. The complex of TF and clotting factor VII has two substrates, clotting factors X and IX.
Clotting factor IX can be activated by means of the intrinsic pathway and the extrinsic pathway. The activation of factor IXa is thus a central point of intersection between the two pathways of activation of clotting.
Factor IXa has an important role in blood clotting. Defects in factor IXa lead to hemophilia B, while increased concentrations of factor IXa in the blood lead to a significantly increased risk of thrombosis formation (Weltermann A, et al., J Thromb Haemost. 2003; 1: 28-32). The regulation of factor IXa activity can reduce thrombus formation in animal models (Feuerstein G Z, et al., Thromb Haemost. 1999; 82: 1443-1445).
Recently, compounds having a Factor IXa antagonism are being studied. Known compounds each having an amide bond are disclosed in, for example, PCT Publication No. 08/031,508 pamphlet (Patent Document 1), PCT Publication No. 08/031,509 pamphlet (Patent Document 2). However, these patent documents do not disclose cyclic morpholinone derivatives.
In the development of pharmaceuticals, it is required to satisfy strict criteria for not only target pharmacological activity but also absorption, distribution, metabolism, excretion, and the like. With respect to drug interactions, desensitization or tolerance, digestive absorption in oral administration, the rate of transfer to a small intestine, the rate of absorption and first-pass effect, an organ barrier, protein binding, induction of a drug-metabolizing enzyme, an excretion pathway and body clearance, a method of administration (an application site, a method, and purpose), and the like, various agenda are required. However, a drug that satisfies these requirements is seldom discovered.
These comprehensive problems in drug development might also exist for Factor IXa antagonists, and Factor IXa antagonists have not yet been released onto the market. More specifically, known compounds having a Factor IXa antagonism may also include problems in terms of usefulness and safety. For example, these compounds may have low absorption, and oral administration of these compounds may be difficult; these compounds also may exhibit inhibitory activity of the human ether-a-go-go related gene (hERG) channel, which may cause arrhythmia, and pharmacokinetics of these compounds might not satisfactory.
Accordingly, a compound in which these problems are solved and which has high activity has been desired.
In its many embodiments, the present invention provides a novel class of cyclic morpholine compounds or its analogue, pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more said compounds, and methods for using said compounds for treating or preventing a thromboses, embolisms, hypercoagulability or fibrotic changes.
The compounds of the Formula (I) according to the invention are suitable for prophylactic and for therapeutic administration to humans who suffer from diseases which accompany thromboses, embolisms, hypercoagulability or fibrotic changes. They can be employed for secondary prevention and are suitable both for acute and for long-term therapy.
The invention therefore relates to a compound of Formula (I)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a solvate thereof;
wherein:
in Formula (I) comprises one to four carbon atoms to form alkylene chain, wherein said alkylene chain or G (imino or methylene) is unsubstituted or substituted independently with one to four R5;
the dotted linkage between W and R4 of the substructure (III)
In another aspect, the present invention relates to a compound of Formula (I)-(A)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a solvate thereof;
wherein:
in Formula (I) comprises one to four carbon atoms, wherein said linkage is unsubstituted or substituted independently with one to four R5;
the dotted linkage between W and R4 of the substructure (III)
In another aspect, the present invention relates to a compound of Formula (I)-(B)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a solvate thereof;
wherein:
in Formula (I) describes one to four carbon atoms, which is unsubstituted or substituted independently with one to four R5,
the dotted linkage between W and R4 of the substructure (III)
In another aspect, the present invention relates to a compound of Formula (I)-(C)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof;
wherein:
the linkage between Oxygen atom and Nitrogen atom of the substructure (II) describes one to four carbon atoms, which is unsubstituted or substituted independently with one to four R5,
the linkage between W and R4 of the substructure (III) is
each nitrogen atom of Z in Formula (I) is unsubstituted or substituted independently with —OH, —O—(C1-C4)-alkyl group, —(CO)—(C1-C4)-alkyl, or —O(CO) —(C1-C4)-alkyl group.
In another aspect, the present invention relates to a compound of Formula (I)-(D)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof;
wherein:
wherein,
In another aspect, compounds of the Formula (I), or (I)(A)-(I)(D) or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt or a solvate thereof can be useful for treating or preventing a disorder or disease mediated by factor IXa, or a thromboembolic disorder (each disorder being a “Condition”).
In another aspect, the present invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one compound of the Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D) or a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The composition can be useful for treating or preventing a Condition.
In another aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating a Condition, the method comprising administering to a patient an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a solvate thereof.
In an embodiment, the present invention provides compounds of Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D) and/or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs thereof. The compounds of Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D) can be useful for treating or preventing a Condition in a patient.
As used above, and throughout this disclosure, the following terms, unless otherwise indicated, shall be understood to have the following meanings: the linkage between G atom and Nitrogen atom of the substructure (II)
in Formula (I) comprises one to four carbon atoms to form alkylene chain, wherein said alkylene chain or G (imino or methylene) is unsubstituted or substituted independently with one to four R5,
the dotted linkage between W and R4 of the substructure (III)
When the substructure (III) denotes the oxazole-Z as a whole, for example, W represents nitrogen atom, X represents oxygen atom and R3 represents absent and R4 and the dotted line represents ethylene carbon atoms, one of which is substituted with —Z, to form oxazole as a whole.
The term “(Ca-Cb)-alkyl”, in which a and b is each independently integers representing 1 to 6, is understood as meaning hydrocarbon radicals whose carbon chain are each straight-chain or branched and contains a to b carbon atoms, for example methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, tertiary-butyl, pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2,3-dimethylbutyl or neohexyl.
The term “—(C0-C4)-alkylene” is understood as meaning a bond or hydrocarbon radicals whose carbon chain is straight-chain or branched and contains 1 to 4 carbon atoms, for example methylene, ethylene, propylene, isopropylene, isobutylene, butylene or tertiary-butylene. “—C0-alkylene” is a covalent bond. The term “—(C1-C4)-alkylene” is understood as meaning hydrocarbon radicals whose carbon chain is straight-chain or branched and contains 1 to 4 carbon atoms, for example methylene (—CH2—), ethylene (—CH2—CH2—), (—CH2(CH3)—), propylene (—CH2—CH2—CH2—), isopropylene, isobutylene, butylene or tertiary-butylene.
The term “—(C3-C12)-cycloalkyl” is understood as meaning rings of 3 to 12 carbon atoms such as compounds which partially have monocycles having 3 to 8 carbon atoms in the ring such as cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, cyclohexane, cycloheptane or cyclooctane, which are derived from the bicycles bicyclo[4.2.0]octane, octahydroindene, decahydronaphthalene, decahydroazulene, decahydrobenzocycloheptene or dodecahydroheptalene or from the bridged cycles such as spiro[2.5]octane, spiro[3.4]octane, spiro[3.5]nonane, bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane, bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane or bicyclo[2.2.2]octane. The term “—(C3-C8)-cycloalkyl” is understood as meaning radicals which are derived from monocycles having 3 to 8 carbon atoms in the ring such as cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, cyclohexane, cyclo-heptane or cyclooctane.
The term “—(C6-C14)-aryl” is understood as meaning aromatic hydrocarbon radicals having 6 to 14 carbon atoms in the ring. —(C6-C14)-aryl radicals are, for example, phenyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, anthryl or fluorenyl. Naphthyl radicals and in particular phenyl radicals are preferred aryl radicals.
The term “three- to fifteen-membered heterocyclic ring” is understood as meaning ring systems having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, which are present in one, two or three ring systems connected to one another and in which one, two, three or four identical or different heteroatoms from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur can replace the respective carbon atoms.
One of the examples of “three- to fifteen-membered heterocyclic ring” is a bicyclic ring system represented by Formula (a):
In the bicyclic ring system represented by Formula (a);
wherein Formula (a) is unsubstituted or substituted independently with one to four Y;
and wherein:
o and p are independently selected from 0 or 1;
J, K, L and M are independently selected from the group consisting of CH2, C(O), NH, O and S(O)q, wherein q is 0, 1 or 2;
D, E and F are independently selected from the group consisting of carbon atom, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom and sulfur atom.
Examples of three- to fifteen-membered heterocyclic ring are the radicals acridinyl, azepinyl, azetidinyl, aziridinyl, benzimidazolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzisoxazole, benzofuranyl, benzothiofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzotetrazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, carbazolyl, 4H-carbazolyl, carbolinyl, beta-carbolinyl, chromanyl, chromenyl, cinnolinyl, deca-hydroquinolinyl, dibenzofuranyl, dibenzothiophenyl, dihydrofuran [2,3-b]-tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, 1,1-dioxido-2H-1,2,4-benzothiadiazinyl, dioxolyl, dioxanyl, dioxolenyl, 2H, 6H-1,5,2-dithiazinyl, furanyl, furazanyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolyl, 1H-indazolyl, indolinyl, indolizinyl, indolyl, isobenzofuranyl, isoquinolinyl, isochromanyl, isoindazolyl, isoindolinyl, isoindolyl, isothiazolidinyl, 2-isothiazolinyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isoxazolidinyl, 2-isoxazolinyl, morpholinyl, naphthyridinyl, octahydroisoquinolinyl, oxadiazolyl, 1,2,3-oxadiazolyl, 1,2,4-oxadiazolyl, 1,2,5-oxadiazolyl, 1,3,4-oxadiazolyl, oxazolidinyl, oxazolyl, oxazolidinyl, oxiranyl, oxothiolanyl, phenanthridinyl, phenanthrenyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxathiinyl, phenoxazinyl, phthalazinyl, piperazinyl, piperidinyl, pteridinyl, purinyl, pyranyl, pyrazinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyridooxazolyl, pyridoimidazolyl, pyridothiazolyl, pyridothiophenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolinyl, pyrrolyl, 2H-pyrrolyl, quinazolinyl, quinolinyl, quinolizinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinuclidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydropyridinyl, tetrazolyl, 6H-1,2,5-thiadazinyl, 1,2,3-thiadiazolyl, 1,2,4-thiadiazolyl, 1,2,5-thiadiazolyl, 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl, thianthrenyl, thiazinyl, thiazolyl, thienyl, thienoimidazolyl, thienooxazolyl, thienopyridinyl, thienopyrrolyl, thienothiazolyl, thienothiophenyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiopyranyl, triazinyl, 1,2,3-triazolyl, 1,2,4-triazolyl, 1,2,5-triazolyl, 1,3,4-triazolyl, xanthenyl, oxindolyl, benzimidazolinyl, benzoxalonyl, 1,3-dihydro-benzisothiazolyl, 3,4-dihydro-2,3-benzothiazinyl, 2,3-dihydro-isoindolyl, 1,4-dihydro-isoquinolinonyl, 3,4-dihydro-quinolinonyl or 3,4-dihydro-benzothiadiazinyl.
The term “—(C1-C3)-haloalkyl” is understood as meaning a partially or completely fluorinated or chlorinated alkyl radical which is selected, for example, from the following radical —CF3, —CHF2, —CH2F, —CHF—CF3, —CHF—CHF2, —CHF—CH2F, —CH2—CF3, —CH2—CHF2, —CH2—CH2F, —CF2—CF3, —CF2—CHF2, —CF2—CH2F, —CH2—CHF—CF3, —CH2—CHF—CHF2, —CH2—CHF—CH2F, —CH2—CH2—CF3, —CH2—CH2—CHF2, —CH2—CH2—CH2F, —CH2—CF2—CF3, —CH2—CF2—CHF2, —CH2—CF2—CH2F, —CHF—CHF—CF3, —CHF—CHF—CHF2, —CHF—CHF—CH2F, —CHF—CH2—CF3, —CHF—CH2—CHF2, —CHF—CH2—CH2F, —CHF—CF2—CF3, —CHF—CF2—CHF2, —CHF—CF2—CH2F, —CF2—CHF—CF3, —CF2—CHF—CHF2, —CF2—CHF—CH2F, —CF2—CH2—CF3, —CF2—CH2—CHF2, —CF2—CH2—CH2F, —CF2—CF2—CF3, —CF2—CF2—CHF2 or —CF2—CF2—CH2F.
The term “halogen” is understood as meaning fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine; fluorine, chlorine or bromine is preferred, in particular fluorine or chlorine is preferred.
The term “a basic nitrogen-containing group” is understood as meaning radicals where the conjugated acid of this group has a pKa of approximately 5 to 15, and preferably 7 to 12, of which nitrogen group can be optionally substituted by one or two the same or different (C1-C6) alkyl group.
Examples of this basic nitrogen-containing group are amino, imino, aminomethyl, amidino (carbamidoyl), guanidino, azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, pyridinyl or aminopyridinyl, and any of the nitrogen atom of these basic nitrogen-containing group can be substituted independently with one or two (C1-C3)-alkyl group.
Examples of —(C6-C14)-aryl-Z, wherein Z is a basic nitrogen-containing group and wherein —(C6-C14)-aryl is unsubstituted or substituted independently with one to four Y, are amidino phenyl (preferably 4-amidino phenyl), amidino chloro phenyl (preferably 4-amidino-2-chloro phenyl), amidino fluoro phenyl (preferably 4-amidino-2-fluoro-phenyl or 4-amidino-3-fluoro-phenyl), amidino methyl phenyl (preferably 4-amidino-2-methyl-phenyl), and aminomethyl phenyl (preferably 4-aminomethyl phenyl).
Examples of (three- to fifteen-membered heterocyclic ring)-Z, wherein Z is a basic nitrogen-containing group and wherein (three- to fifteen-membered heterocyclic ring) is unsubstituted or additionally substituted independently with one to four Y, are 1-aminoisoquinolinyl (preferably 1-aminoisoquinolin-6-yl), 1-imino-2,3-dihydroisoindolyl (preferably 1-imino-2,3-dihydroisoindol-5-yl), 2-amino-3H-benzimidazolyl (preferably 2-amino-3H-benzimidazol-5-yl), 3-amino-benzoisoxazolyl (preferably 3-amino-benzoisoxazole-6-yl), 3-amino-indazolyl (preferably 3-amino-indazole-6-yl), 4-amino-quinazolinyl (preferably 4-amino-quinazoline-7-yl).
Examples of the substructure (III) in Formula (I),
wherein the dotted linkage between W and R4 is present such that substructure (III) is a (three- to fifteen-membered heterocyclic ring)-Z, wherein said Z is a basic nitrogen-containing group and wherein said (three- to fifteen-membered heterocyclic ring) is unsubstituted or additionally substituted independently with one to four Y, are 6-amidino-benzimidazole-2-yl, 7-amidino-1,1-dioxo-2H-1,2,4-benzothiadiazin-3-yl.
Functional groups of the intermediates used, for example amino or carboxyl groups, can be masked here by suitable protective groups. Suitable protective groups for amino functions are, for example, para methoxy benzyl, benzyl, t-butoxycarbonyl, benzyloxycarbonyl, phthalolyl, trityl or tosyl protective group. Suitable protective groups for the carboxyl function are, for example, alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl esters. Protective groups can be introduced and removed by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme). The term protective group can also include polymer-bound protective groups. Such masked compounds according to Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D), in which, for example, the functional groups of the radicals R1, R2, R3 or R4 can optionally also be masked, can, although optionally themselves not pharmacologically active, optionally be converted after administration to mammals by metabolization to the pharmacologically active compounds according to the invention.
When any variable (e.g., aryl, R1, etc.) occurs more than one time in any constituent or in Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D), its definition on each occurrence is independent of its definition at every other occurrence.
As used herein, the term “composition” is intended to encompass a product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts.
In the embodiments described below in [1-1] to [8-1] of the present invention, unless otherwise noted, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, G, W, X, m, n or other definitions, for example, R6, R7, R8, V, Y, Z, T, U, etc in the substituents as well as D, E, F, J, K, L, M, o or p etc in the sub-Formulae, shown in the each descriptions are the same as defined above for the Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D). In the embodiments, compounds having Factor IXa antagonistic activity (determined by, for example, pharmacological examples described below: a measurement of fluorescence value using microtiter plate reader, ARVO 1420 Multilabel Counter) of 30 μM or less, preferably 1 μM or less, more preferably 100 nM or less, and the most preferably 50 nM or less in terms of an IC50 value are preferably used.
In the embodiments described in this description, “agent” or “drug” means a material which is used for improvement of disease or symptom, not only for treatment of disease or symptom.
In all the above embodiments, when the term “compound” is used, the term also refers to pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. The compounds of the present invention have asymmetric carbon atoms. Accordingly, the compounds of the present invention include mixtures of various stereoisomers, such as geometrical isomers, tautomers, such as keto- and enol-tautomers, or amidino- and imidino-tautomers, and optical isomers, and isolated isomers, for example, (R,R), (S,S), (R,S) and (S,R) isomers. (R,R) isomer is preferred. Specific example of (R,R) isomer compound is, for example, (2R)—N-(4-amidinophenyl)-2-hydroxy-2-[(2R)-3-oxo-4-p-tolylmorpholin-2-yl]acetamide hydrochloride (EXAMPLE 7). The isolation and the purification of such stereoisomers can be performed by those skilled in the art with a known technique such as optical resolution using preferential crystallization or column chromatography, or asymmetric synthesis.
The compounds represented by Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D) of the present invention may form acid addition salts. Alternatively, these compounds may form salts with a base according to the type of substituent. These salts are not particularly limited as long as the salts are pharmaceutically acceptable salts. Specific examples of the salts include acid addition salts with a mineral acid such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, or phosphoric acid; an organic carboxylic acid such as an aliphatic monocarboxylic acid, e.g., formic acid, acetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid (TFA), propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, enanthic acid, capric acid, myristic acid, palmitic acid, stearic acid, lactic acid, sorbic acid, or mandelic acid, an aromatic monocarboxylic acid, e.g., benzoic acid or salicylic acid, an aliphatic dicarboxylic acid, e.g., oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, malic acid, or tartaric acid, and an aliphatic tricarboxylic acid e.g., citric acid; an organic sulfonic acid such as an aliphatic sulfonic acid, e.g., methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid, or 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, or an aromatic sulfonic acid, e.g., benzenesulfonic acid or p-toluenesulfonic acid; or an acidic amino acid, e.g., aspartic acid or glutamic acid; salts with a metal such as an alkali metal, e.g., sodium or potassium, or an alkaline earth metal, e.g., magnesium or calcium; salts with an organic base such as methylamine, ethylamine, ethanolamine, pyridine, lysine, arginine, or ornithine; and ammonium salts.
These salts can be obtained by a known method, for example, by mixing a compound of the present invention with an equivalent amount and a solution containing a desired acid, base, or the like, and then collecting the desired salt by filtering the salt or distilling off the solvent.
The compounds of the present invention and salts thereof can form solvates with a solvent such as water, ethanol, or glycerol.
The salts of a compound of the present invention include monosalts and di-salts. The compounds of the present invention can form an acid addition salt and a salt with a base at the same time according to the type of substituent of the side chain.
Furthermore, the present invention includes hydrates, pharmaceutically acceptable various solvates, and crystal polymorphism of the compounds represented by Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D) of the present invention. The present invention is not limited to the compounds described in examples below and includes all compounds represented by Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D) of the present invention and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
Prodrugs and solvates of the compounds of the invention are also contemplated herein. A discussion of prodrugs is provided in T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, 14, 1987, of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, 1987, Edward B. Roche, ed., American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press. The term “prodrug” means a compound (e.g, a drug precursor) that is transformed in vivo to yield a compound of Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or a solvate of the compound. The transformation may occur by various mechanisms (e.g., by metabolic or chemical processes), such as, for example, through hydrolysis in blood. A discussion of the use of prodrugs is provided by T. Higuchi and W. Stella, “Pro-drugs as Nobel Delivery Systems,” Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, ed. Edward B. Roche, American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987.
For example, if a compound of Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or a solvate of the compound contains an alcohol functional group, a prodrug can be formed by the replacement of the hydrogen atom of the alcohol group with a group such as, for example, (C1-C6)alkanoyloxymethyl, 1-((C1-C6)alkanoyloxy)ethyl, 1-methyl-1-((C1-C6)alkanoyloxy)ethyl, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyloxymethyl, N—(C1-C6)alkoxycarbonylaminomethyl, succinoyl, (C1-C6)alkanoyl, α-amino(C1-C4)alkanyl, arylacyl and α-aminoacyl, or α-aminoacyl-α-aminoacyl, where each α-aminoacyl group is independently selected from the naturally occurring L-amino acids, —P(O)(OH)2, —P(O)(O(C1-C6)alkyl)2 or glycosyl (the radical resulting from the removal of a hydroxyl group of the hemiacetal from of a carbohydrate), and the like.
If a compound of Formula (I) or (I)(A)-(I)(D) incorporates an amine functional group or imine functional group, for example, such as a part of amidino group, a prodrug can be formed by the replacement of a hydrogen atom of the amine group or imine group with a group such as, for example, hydroxyl group, RO—, R-carbonyl, RO-carbonyl, NRR′-carbonyl where R and R′ are each independently hydrogen atom, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C7)cycloalkyl, benzyl, or R-carbonyl is a natural α-aminoacyl or natural β-aminoacyl, —CH(OY2)Y3 wherein Y2 is (C1-C4) alkyl and Y3 is (C1-C6)alkyl, carboxy (C1-C6)alkyl, amino(C1-C4)alkyl or mono-N- or di-N,N—(C1-C6)alkylaminoalkyl, —CH(Y4)Y5 wherein Y4 is H or methyl and Y5 is mono-N- or di-N,N—(C1-C6)alkylamino morpholino, piperidin-1-yl or pyrrolidin-1-yl and the like.
[1-1] The invention therefore relates to a compound of Formula (I)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a solvate thereof;
wherein:
in Formula (I) comprises one to four carbon atoms to form alkylene chain, wherein said alkylene chain or G (imino or methylene) is unsubstituted or substituted independently with one to four R5;
the dotted linkage between W and R4 of the substructure (III)
[2-2] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I), wherein Formula (II),
and preferably,
[2-3] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I), wherein Formula (III),
[2-4] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I′),
[2-5] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I″),
[2-6] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I′″),
[3-1] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I), wherein:
wherein Formula (a) is unsubstituted or substituted independently with one to four Y; and wherein:
o and p are independently selected from 0 or 1;
J, K, L and M are independently selected from the group consisting of CH2, C(O), NH,
O and S(O)q, wherein q is 0, 1 or 2;
D, E and F are independently selected from the group consisting of carbon atom, nitrogen atom, oxygen atom and sulfur atom.
[4-1] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I), wherein Z represents a radical whose conjugate acid has a pKa of 5 to 15.
[4-2] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I), wherein Z represents a radical whose conjugate acid has a pKa of 7 to 12.
[4-3] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I), wherein Z represents a radical selected from the group consisting of amino, imino, aminomethyl, amidino (carbamimidoyl), guanidino, azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, pyridinyl and aminopyridinyl, and wherein any nitrogen atom of each of said aforementioned Z radicals is unsubstituted or substituted independently with one or two (C1-3) alkyl.
[5-1] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I), wherein the substructure Formula (III)
W is oxygen atom, X(R3) is NH, the dotted linkage is absent, and R4 is a (three- to fifteen-membered heterocyclic ring)-Z, wherein said Z is a basic nitrogen-containing group and wherein said (three- to fifteen-membered heterocyclic ring) is unsubstituted or additionally substituted independently with one to four Y.
[5-2] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I), wherein W of the substructure Formula (III) is oxygen atom, X(R3) of the substructure Formula (III) is NH, the dotted linkage between W and R4 of the substructure Formula (III) is absent, and R4 is —(C6-C14)-aryl-Z, wherein Z is a basic nitrogen-containing group and wherein said —(C6-C14)-aryl is unsubstituted or additionally substituted independently with one to four Y.
[5-3] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I), wherein W of the substructure Formula (III) is oxygen atom, X(R3) of the substructure Formula (III) is NH, the dotted linkage between W and R4 of the substructure Formula (III) is absent, and R4 is -benzimidazole-Z, wherein Z is a basic nitrogen-containing group and wherein said benzimidazole is unsubstituted or additionally substituted independently with one to four Y.
[5-4] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I), wherein W of the substructure Formula (III) is oxygen atom, X(R3) of the substructure Formula (III) is NH, the dotted linkage between W and R4 of the substructure Formula (III) is absent, and R4 is -phenyl-Z, wherein Z is a basic nitrogen-containing group and wherein said phenyl is unsubstituted or additionally substituted independently with one to four Y.
[5-5] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (I), wherein W of the substructure Formula (III) is oxygen atom, X(R3) of the substructure Formula (III) is NH, the dotted linkage between W and R4 of the substructure Formula (III) is absent, and R4 is -phenyl-Z, wherein Z is a basic nitrogen-containing group and wherein said phenyl is unsubstituted or additionally substituted with Y selected from the group consisting of:
[7-1] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of the Formula (IV):
((R,R) isomer) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein R1 is a group selected from the group consisting of:
and wherein
is selected from the group consisting of
[7-1-1] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of [7-1] wherein R1 is a group selected from the group consisting of:
a1 to a33, a64 to a164,
and wherein the substructure of the Formula (IV)
is selected from the group consisting of:
b1, b4, b49 to b61.
[7-2] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds selected from the group consisting of:
or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a solvate thereof.
Each compound name from example 1 to example 37 is,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
Each compound name from example 1p to example 24p is,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
Each compound name from example 38 to example 67 is,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
Each compound name from example 68 to example 217 is,
((R,R) isomer) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein R1 is a group selected from the group consisting of a1 to a166 described in [7-1],
and wherein formula (III) in the formula (V)
is selected from the group consisting of b1 to b61 described in [7-1].
[7-6-1] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds of [7-6] wherein R1 is a group selected from the group consisting of:
a1 to a33, a64 to a199,
and wherein the substructure of the Formula (V)
is selected from the group consisting of:
b1, b4, b49 to b67.
[8-1] In another aspect, the present invention provides (R,R) optically active isomers of compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by Formula (I), Example compounds 1 to 208, Example compounds 1p to 24p, combination compounds represented by Formula (IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a solvate thereof.
Combination compounds represented by Formula (IV) are expressed as general Compound (a1, b1) (IV) to Compound (a200, b67) (IV) as total 13400 subformula. For example, Compound (a1, b1) (IV) corresponds to the structure of:
wherein n, G and R5 is the same definition as Formula (I).
Combination compounds represented by Formula (V) are expressed as Compound (a1, b1) to Compound (a200, b67) as total 13400 compounds. For example, Compound (a1, b1) corresponds to the structure of:
The invention also provides compounds of Formula (aI)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a solvate thereof, wherein
provided that
when A is
and
when A is
In one aspect of the invention, the compounds are of the formula
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a solvate thereof, wherein
provided that
when A is
and
when A is
In another aspect of the invention, the compounds are of the absolute configuration of Formula (aIa) is
In another aspect of the invention, the compound is
In another embodiment, the compound is
In another embodiment, the compound is
In another embodiment, the compound is
The compounds represented by Formula (I) and salts thereof, which are the compounds of the present invention can be readily produced from known compounds or commercially available compounds by, for example, known processes described in published documents, and produced by production processes described below. The present invention is not limited to the production processes described below.
Unless otherwise noted, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, G, W, X, m, and n in the formulae shown in the description of the production method are as defined above for the Formula (I). The alkylene group in the side chain or ring of the compound may be substituted with the substituents defined for the Formula (I). R4′ and R in the formulae shown in the description of the production method are defined in the corresponding part.
Unless otherwise noted, each of P1, P2, P3, P4 or P5 in the production method independently designate protecting group, and exemplary appropriate protecting groups include typical an arylmethyl group such as benzyl group, para methoxy benzyl group or triphenylmethyl group; acyl protecting groups, namely, an alkanoyl group such as acetyl group; an alkoxycarbonyl group such as methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, or t-butoxycarbonyl group; an arylmethoxycarbonyl group such as benzyloxycarbonyl group, paramethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl group, or para(ortho)nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl group; or an aroyl group such as benzoyl group. The method used for deprotecting such protecting group differs depending on the chemical nature of the protecting group employed, and in the case of an arylmethyl group such as para methoxy benzyl group or benzyl group, the deprotection can be accomplished by hydrogenation using a palladium-carbon catalyst for conversion into nitrogen-hydrogen bond, or alternatively, by Birch reduction using metal sodium in liquid ammonia, or by oxidative condition using such as CAN (ceric ammonium nitrate) or DDQ (2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyano-p-benzoquinone). The triphenylmethyl group can be removed by using an appropriate acid such as acetic acid, hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, trifluoroacetic acid, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid, or a combination thereof, or alternatively, or by Birch reduction using metal sodium in liquid ammonia.
In the case of an acyl protecting group such as an alkanoyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or aroyl group, the deprotection can be accomplished by the hydrolysis using an appropriate base such as an alkaline metal hydroxide such as lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, or potassium hydroxide.
The substituted methoxycarbonyl protecting group such as t-butoxycarbonyl group or paramethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl group can be removed by an appropriate acid such as acetic acid, hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, trifluoroacetic acid, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid, or a combination thereof.
The arylmethoxycarbonyl group such as benzyloxycarbonyl group, paramethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl group, or para(ortho)nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl group can be removed by the hydrolysis using a palladium-carbon catalyst. The protecting groups P1, P2, P3, P4 or P5 of the imino group (—NH—) can be independently or simultaneously deprotected by adequately selecting the type of the protecting group and deprotection conditions, and if desired, the protecting group can be re-introduced.
Unless otherwise noted, each of L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7 or L8 in the production method designates a leaving group such as a halogen atom (for example, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine), methanesulfonyloxy group, or p-toluenesulfonyloxy group, or a replaceable substituent such as hydroxy group or an alkoxy group.
It should be noted that, when the derivative of the Formula (I) of the present invention synthesized has a reactive group such as hydroxy group, amino group, carboxyl group, or thiol group as its substituent, such group may be adequately protected with a protective group in each reaction step and the protective group may be removed at an adequate stage. The process of such introduction and removal of the protective group may be adequately determined depending on the group to be protected and the type of the protective group, and such introduction and removal are conducted, for example, by the process described in the review section of Greene, T. W., et. al., “Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis”, 2007, 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., “Protecting Groups” 1994, Thieme. The required starting materials, such as (i-a), (i-b), (i-c), (i-d), (i-e), (i-f), (i-g), (ii-a), (iii-a), (iii-b), (v-b), (viii-a), (viii-b), (viii-c), (viii-d), (viii-e), (ix-a), (xvi-a), or (xvii-a) are either commercially available, or capable of being readily synthesized by the method commonly used in the organic chemistry from commercially available products. Unless otherwise noted, the reaction conditions employed in the production method are as described below:
Reaction temperature is in the range of −78° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature, and reaction time is the time sufficient for required progress of the reaction. Solvent which is not involved in the reaction may be any of the aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as toluene and benzene; polar solvents such as water, methanol, DMF, and DMSO; basic solvents such as triethylamine and pyridine; halogen solvents such as chloroform, methylene chloride, and 1,2-dichloroethane; ethereal solvent such as diethylether, tetrahydrofuran, and dioxane; and mixed solvents thereof; and the solvent used may be adequately selected depending on the reaction conditions. Base may be any of inorganic bases such as potassium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, and sodium hydride; and organic bases such as triethylamine, pyridine, N,N-dialkylaniline, lithium diisopropylamide and lithium hexamethyldisilazide; and acid may be any of mineral acids such as hydrochloric acid, and sulfuric acid; and organic acids such as methanesulfonic acid, trifluoroacetic acid and p-toluenesulfonic acid. The base and the acid are not necessarily limited to those mentioned above. The production processes will now be described in detail.
A compound represented by formula (ii-a) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (i-a) to react with a commercially available aminoalcohol or aminothiol (i-g), readily prepared aminoalcohol or aminothiol from known compounds by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Organic Synthesis, Collective Vol. 5, pp. 88 1973, in the presence of a base such as potassium tert-buthoxide, sodium hydride, lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium carbonate, sodium carbonate, or potassium carbonate using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as methanol, ethanol, acetone, N,N-dimethylformamide, dioxane or tetrahydrofuran, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
Alternatively, a compound represented by formula (ii-a) can be produced by conducting a reaction using a compound represented by formula (i-b) by a process of reductive amination. After a compound represented by formula (i-b) is converted to an imine with a suitable aminoalcohol (i-g), an aminothiol (i-g) using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, 1,4-dioxane, or an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature, a compound represented by formula (ii-a) can be produced by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Journal of Medical Chemistry, 23(12), pp. 1405-1410, 1980 in the presence of a reductive reagent such as sodium borohydride using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, 1,4-dioxane, or an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
Alternatively, hydrogen gas can be used to an imine with a suitable process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 26, Organic synthesis VIII, Asymmetric synthesis, reduction, sugar, and labeled compound, pp. 251-266, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a catalyst such as palladium-carbon (Pd—C), Raney-Ni, or platinum oxide (PtO2) in a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran, a polar solvent, e.g., ethyl acetate or acetonitrile, an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene, or an acid solvent, e.g., acetic acid at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature, thereby producing a compound represented by formula (ii-a).
Alternatively, a compound represented by formula (ii-a) can be produced by conducting a reaction using a compound represented by formula (i-c) by a process similar to that of <step 1-1> with a suitable alcohol or thiol in the presence of copper iodide and cesium carbonate using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as acetonitrile.
A compound represented by formula (II-b) can be produced by conducting a reaction using a compound represented by formula (II-c) and a compound represented by formula (i-c) (for example, a known amine) as follows. When a compound represented by formula (II-c) is a carboxylic acid, a compound represented by formula (II-b) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (II-c) to react with a compound represented by formula (i-c) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 22, Organic synthesis IV, Acids, amino acids, and peptides, pp. 191-309, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a condensing agent such as 1,3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC), 1-ethyl-3-(3′-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride (WSC.HCl), benzotriazol-1-yloxy tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (BOP reagent), bis(2-oxo-3-oxazolidinyl)phosphinic chloride (BOP-Cl), 2-chloro-1,3-dimethylimidazolinium hexafluorophosphate (CIP), or 4-(4,6-dimethoxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-4-methylmorpholinium chloride, in a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran, an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene, a polar solvent, e.g., N,N-dimethylformamide, or an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, in the presence or absence of a base such as triethylamine or pyridine at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature. When a compound represented by formula (II-c) is an acid halide, a compound represented by formula (II-b) can be similarly produced by conducting a reaction with a compound represented by formula (i-c) by a process similar to that described in, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 22, Organic synthesis IV, Acids, amino acids, and peptides, pp. 144-146, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a base such as triethylamine or pyridine in a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran, an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene, or a polar solvent, e.g., N,N-dimethylformamide at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (II-c) can be produced by the same process as that used in <Step 1-1> of (Reaction Scheme 1) using a compound represented by formula (i-d) and compound represented by formula (i-e).
A compound represented by formula (II-c) can be produced from a compound represented by formula (i-f) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 22, Organic synthesis IV, Acids, amino acids, and peptides, pp. 1-43, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a base such as lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium carbonate, sodium carbonate, or potassium carbonate using water and a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, N,N-dimethylformamide, dioxane, or tetrahydrofuran, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (iii-a) can be produced by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Zhurnal Organicheskoi Khimii, (6), 1305-8, 1970, or by a similar process as that used in <Step 1-4> and <step 1-5> of (Reaction Scheme 1) using a compound represented by formula (i-e) as an acid halide, and compound represented by formula (ii-a) as a suitable aminoalcohol or aminothiol. When aminothiol (ii-a) was used, cyclization process of producing a compound represented by formula (iii-a) can be also conducted step by step process using different base or different solvent system.
Alternatively, a compound represented by formula (iii-a) can be produced by the same process as that used in <Step 2-1> of (Reaction Scheme 1) using a compound represented by formula (II-b).
Protective groups of a compound represented by formula (iii-a) can be introduced and removed between (iii-a) and (iii-b) by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme).
A compound represented by formula (iv-a) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (iii-a) or (iii-b), which was produced in the Reaction scheme 1 or commercially available, to react with alkyl glyoxylate, such as ethyl glyoxylate by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Journal of Medicinal Chemistry, 31(1), pp. 230-243, 1988, in the presence of a base such as lithium hexamethyldisiladide, sodium hydride, lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium carbonate, sodium carbonate, or potassium carbonate using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide, dioxane, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature. The resulting alcoholic compound (iv-a) wherein R2 represents hydrogen can be protected in any step described hereafter by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme), to be, for example, alcoxy groups or ester groups.
Protective groups of a compound represented by formula (iv-a) can be introduced and removed between (iv-a) and (iv-b) by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme).
A compound represented by formula (v-a) can be produced by the same process as that used in <Step 1-6> of (Reaction Scheme 1) using a compound represented by formula (iv-a) or (iv-c).
A compound represented by formula (v-c) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (iv-a) to react with a compound represented by formula (v-b) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Organic synthesis IV, Acids, amino acids, and peptides, pp. 191-309, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a condensing agent, in a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, in the presence or absence of a base such as triethylamine or pyridine at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (iv-c) can be produced by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Organic synthesis, Collective Vol. 7, pp. 221, 1990, Organic synthesis, Collective Vol. 7, pp. 530, 1990, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 26, Reduction by borane, hydrazine or diimide pp 237-248, using a compound represented by formula (iv-a) in the presence of borane-THF complex, borane-diethyl ether complex, borane-dimethyl sulfide complex, hydradine or hydroxylamine using a solvent such as an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran at a temperature in the range of −78° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (v-c) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (v-a) to react with a compound represented by formula (v-b) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Organic synthesis IV, Acids, amino acids, and peptides, pp. 191-309, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a condensing agent such as 1,3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC), 1-ethyl-3-(3′-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride (WSC.HCl), benzotriazol-1-yloxy tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (BOP reagent), bis(2-oxo-3-oxazolidinyl)phosphinic chloride (BOP-Cl), 2-chloro-1,3-dimethylimidazolinium hexafluorophosphate (CIP), or 4-(4,6-dimethoxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-4-methylmorpholinium chloride, in a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran, an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene, a polar solvent, e.g., N,N-dimethylformamide, or an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, in the presence or absence of a base such as triethylamine or pyridine at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature. When a compound represented by formula (v-a) is converted to an acid halide, a compound represented by formula (v-c) can be similarly produced by conducting a reaction by a process similar to that described in, for example, Organic synthesis IV, Acids, amino acids, and peptides, pp. 144-146, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a base such as triethylamine or pyridine in a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran, an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene, or a polar solvent, e.g., N,N-dimethylformamide at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
Alternatively, a compound represented by formula (v-c) can be produced by using triphosgene by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Letters in Organic Chemistry, 4, 20-22, 2007, in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide, dioxane, CH2Cl2 or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
Protective groups of a compound represented by formula (v-c) can be introduced and removed between (v-c) and (v-d) by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme).
A compound represented by formula (vi-d) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 5-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (v-a).
A compound represented by formula (vii-a) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (vi-a) to react with by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Synthetic Communications, 37(24), 2007, in the presence of an acid such as acetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid or p-toluenesulfonic acid using a solvent such as acetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
Alternately, a compound represented by formula (vii-a) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 3-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (iii-a) and a compound represented by formula (vi-b).
Alternatively, a compound represented by formula (vii-a) can be produced by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters, 17(14), 2007, 3860 using a compound represented by formula (vi-d) and a compound represented by formula (vi-c), wherein Ra represents a suitable substituent.
Protective groups of a compound represented by formula (vi-a) can be introduced and removed between (vii-a) and (vii-b) by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme).
A compound represented by formula (viii-a) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (iv-a) to react with by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Organic synthesis, Collective Vol 1, pp. 238, 1941, Maruzen Co., Ltd, in the presence of a base such as sodium ethoxide using a solvent such as ethanol at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
Ra of the formula (vi-c) represents a suitable substituent or leaving group of L1 to L4 described above.
A compound represented by formula (vii-a) can be produced by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Journal of Medicinal Chemistry, 48, 14, pp 4541, 2005, using a compound represented by formula (viii-a) in the presence of hydradine or hydroxylamine using a solvent such as ethanol at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
Furthermore, in the case of some of the compounds according to the invention the possibility arises of employing diastereomerically or enantiomerically pure starting products for the preparation of the ring structures. By this means, other or simplified processes can be employed for the purification of the final products. These starting products were prepared beforehand in enantiomerically or diastereomerically pure form according to processes known from the literature. This can mean, in particular, that in the synthesis of the scaffold structures either enantioselective processes are used, or else an enantiomeric (or diastereomeric) separation is carried out at an earlier stage of the synthesis and not only at the stage of the final products. Likewise, a simplification of the separations can be achieved by proceeding in two or more stages.
A compound represented by formula (viii-b) can be produced from (viii-a) by conducting a reaction using the compound represented by formula (viii-a) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 26, Organic synthesis VIII, Asymmetric synthesis, reduction, sugar, and labeled compound, pp. 159-266, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a catalyst such as palladium-carbon (Pd—C), Raney-Ni, platinum oxide (PtO2), or dichloro triphenyl phosphine ruthenium, under hydrogen atmosphere, using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, or 1,4-dioxane, a polar solvent, e.g., ethyl acetate or methyl acetate, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
Alternatively, a compound represented by formula (viii-b) can be produced from (viii-a) by using Fe, or Sn, in hydrochloric acid or acetic acid, at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature. Furthermore, a compound represented by formula (viii-b) can also be produced from (viii-a) by using sodium borohydride in the presence of Lewis Acid, e.g., Nickel(II) chloride (NiCl2), Tin(II) chloride (SnCl2) using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, or 1,4-dioxane, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (viii-d) can be produced by conducting a reaction using a compound represented by formula (viii-b) by a process of reductive amination. After a compound represented by formula (viii-c) is converted to an imine with a suitable amine (viii-b) using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, such as a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, 1,4-dioxane, or an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature, a compound represented by formula (viii-d) can be produced by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Journal of Medical Chemistry, 23(12), pp. 1405-1410, 1980 in the presence of a reductive reagent such as sodium borohydride or sodium triacetoxy borohydride in the presence of acid such as acetyl alcohol, using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, 1,4-dioxane, or an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
Alternatively, hydrogen gas can be used to hydrogenate an imine with a suitable process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 26, Asymmetric synthesis, reduction, sugar, and labeled compound, pp. 251-266, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a catalyst such as palladium-carbon (Pd—C), Raney-Ni, or platinum oxide (PtO2) in a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran, a polar solvent, e.g., ethyl acetate or acetonitrile, an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene, or an acid solvent, e.g., acetic acid at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature, thereby producing a compound represented by formula (viii-d).
A compound represented by formula (viii-f) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 5-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (viii-e).
A compound represented by formula (viii-d) can be produced by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 26, Reduction by borane, hydrazine or diimide pp 237-248, using a compound represented by formula (viii-f) in the presence of hydradine or hydroxylamine using a solvent such as ethanol at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (ix-b) can be produced by conducting a reaction using (2R,3R)-2,3-diacetoxysuccinic anhydride represented by formula (ix-a) in the presence of amine (v-b) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Organic Synthesis, Collective Vol. 3, pp. 169 1955, using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as tetrahydrofuran, N, N-dimethylformamide, dioxane, CH2Cl2 or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (x-a) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (ix-b) to react with a compound represented by formula (viii-d) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 26, Acids, amino acids, and peptides, pp. 193-309, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a condensing agent such as 1,3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC), 1-ethyl-3-(3′-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride (WSC.HCl), benzotriazol-1-yloxy tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (BOP reagent), bis(2-oxo-3-oxazolidinyl)phosphinic chloride (BOP-Cl), 2-chloro-1,3-dimethylimidazolinium hexafluorophosphate (CIP), or 4-(4,6-dimethoxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-4-methylmorpholinium chloride, in a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran, an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene, a polar solvent, e.g., N,N-dimethylformamide, or an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, in the presence or absence of a base such as triethylamine or pyridine at a temperature in the range of −78° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature. When a compound represented by formula (ix-b) is converted to an acid halide, a compound represented by formula (x-a) can be similarly produced by conducting a reaction by a process similar to that described in, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 26, Acids, amino acids, and peptides, pp. 144-146, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a base such as triethylamine or pyridine in a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran, an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene, or a polar solvent, e.g., N,N-dimethylformamide at a temperature in the range of −78° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
Alternatively, a compound represented by formula (x-a) can be produced by using triphosgene with (ix-b) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Letters in Organic Chemistry, 4, 20-22, 2007, in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide, dioxane, CH2Cl2 or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (ix-c), wherein R represents hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl group, can be produced by conducting a reaction using (2R,3R)-2,3-diacetoxysuccinic anhydride represented by formula (ix-a) in the presence of suitable alcoholic solvent by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Organic Synthesis, Collective Vol. 3, pp. 169 1955, using a solvent, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., benzyl alcohol, tert-buthyl alcohol, methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, or tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide, dioxane, CH2Cl2 or a mixed solvent thereof in the presence of DMAP at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (ix-d) can be produced by the same process as that used in <Step 9-2> of (Reaction Scheme 5) using a compound represented by formula (ix-c).
A compound represented by formula (ix-d) wherein R represents hydrogen atom can be produced by allowing (2R,3R)-2,3-diacetoxysuccinic anhydride represented by formula (ix-a) to react with a compound represented by formula (viii-d) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Organic Synthesis, Collective Vol. 3, pp. 169 1955, Organic Synthesis, Collective Vol. 5, pp. 944, 1973, Vol. 41, 93, 1961, or Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 26, Acids, amino acids, and peptides, pp. 146-148, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., using a solvent, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran, a polar solvent, e.g., DMF, ethyl acetate or acetonitrile, an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene, or an acid solvent, e.g., acetic acid or a mixed solvent thereof in the presence of DMAP, Pyridine or sulfuric acid as a catalyst if needed at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (x-a) can also be produced by the same process as that used in <Step 4-3> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (ix-d) wherein R represents C1-6 alkyl group in the presence of amine (v-b), and also be produced by the same process as that used in <step 5-1> of (Reaction scheme 2) or <step 13-3> and <step 13-4> of (Reaction scheme 11) using a compound represented by formula (ix-d) wherein R represents hydrogen atom, in the presence of amine (v-b).
Protective groups of a compound in the process of producing a compound represented by formula (x-a) can be introduced and removed by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme).
A compound represented by formula (ix-e) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (ix-d) to react with a compound represented by formula (ix-g) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 22, Organic synthesis IV, Acids, amino acids, and peptides, pp. 1-82, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of an acidic reagent such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, thionyl chloride, or acetyl chloride, using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether, dioxane, or tetrahydrofuran, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of −78° C. to the room temperature.
A compound represented by formula (ix-d) can be produced by conducting a reaction using a compound represented by formula (ix-e) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Can. J. Chem., 49, 493 (1971) or Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., in the presence of ammonia, using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether, dioxane, or tetrahydrofuran, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of −78° C. to the room temperature.
A compound represented by formula (x-b) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 9-8> of (Reaction Scheme 6) using a compound represented by formula (x-a).
Protective groups of a compound in the process of producing a compound represented by formula (x-b) can be introduced and removed by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme).
A compound represented by formula (x-c) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (x-b) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Organic Synthesis, Collective Vol. 6, pp. 301, 395, 1988, or Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 20, alcohol and amine, pp. 187-194, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a base such as potassium tert-buthoxide, sodium hydride, lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium carbonate, sodium carbonate, or potassium carbonate using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, tert-buthanol, or a polar solvent, e.g., DMF, DMSO, ethyl acetate, or acetonitril, or an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene, or acetone, dioxane or tetrahydrofuran, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
Protective groups of a compound represented by formula (x-c) can be introduced and removed by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme).
When R4′ is used as a precursor for R4 representing 4-amidino-phenyl group or its analogue, R4′ represents 4-cyano-phenyl group or 1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-one-3-yl phenyl group or their analogues, which can be converted to 4-amidino-phenyl group R4 or its analogue by techniques which are well-known or described:
When R4′ of a compound represented by formula (x-c) of Scheme 6 represents 4-cyano-(aryl or heteroaryl) group or its analogue wherein 4-cyano-(aryl or heteroaryl) ring is optionally substituted with one to four Y, a compound represented by formula (xi-a) which corresponds to a compound (x-c) can be converted to a compound represented by formula (xi-b) via its imidate compound.
4-cyano-(aryl or heteroaryl) group or, R4′ of a compound represented by formula (xi-a), can be converted to its imidate by allowing a compound represented by formula (xi-a) to acidic condition such as HCl gas solution of, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the room temperature.
Resulting imidate compound is converted to 4-amidino-(aryl or heteroaryl) compound (xi-b) or its analogue by conducting an imidate compound to ammonium or ammonium carbonate alcoholic solvent, e.g. methanol, ethanol, tert-buthanol or in a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature in a sealed tube.
Alternatively, when R4′ represents 4-cyano-(aryl or heteroaryl) group or its analogue wherein 4-cyano-(aryl or heteroaryl) is optionally substituted with one to four Y, a compound represented by formula (xi-a) can be converted to 4-amidino-(aryl or heteroaryl) group R4 via its N-hydroxy amidine compound.
4-cyano group, R4′ of a compound represented by formula (xi-a), can be converted to its N-hydroxy amidino group by allowing a compound (xi-a) in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine, hunig base, potassium tert-buthoxide, sodium hydride, lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium carbonate, sodium carbonate, or potassium carbonate using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as water, methanol, ethanol, acetone, N,N-dimethylformamide, dioxane or tetrahydrofuran, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature in a sealed tube.
Resulting N-hydroxy amidino group can be converted to its amidine compound represented by formula (xi-b) by a suitable process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 26, Asymmetric synthesis, reduction, sugar, and labeled compound, pp. 251-266, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of a catalyst such as palladium-carbon (Pd—C), Raney-Ni, or platinum oxide (PtO2) in a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran, a polar solvent, e.g., ethyl acetate or acetonitrile, an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene, or an acid solvent, e.g., acetic acid or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
When R4′ is used as a precursor for R4 representing 4-amidino-(aryl or heteroaryl) group or its analogue wherein 4-amidino-(aryl or heteroaryl) group is optionally substituted with one to four Y, R4′ also represents 1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-one-3-yl (aryl or heteroaryl) group or its analogues wherein phenyl group is optionally substituted with one to four Y, which can be converted to 4-amidino-(aryl or heteroaryl) group R4 by techniques which are well-known or described here.
A compound represented by formula (xi-d) can be produced by the same process as that used in <Step 8-1> of (Reaction Scheme 4) using a compound represented by formula (xi-c).
When G in the formula (xi-c) represents sulfur atom, sulfur can be oxidized to its sulfone or sulfoxide with Oxone® by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Shin-Jikken Kagaku Kouza, Vol. 14-III, p 1759, R. J. Kennedy, J. Org. Chem., 25, 1901 (1960), B. M. Trost, Tetrahedron Lett., 22, 1287 (1981), in the presence of Oxone® using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as water, or an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, a halogenated solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or chloroform, an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether, dioxane, or tetrahydrofuran, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
When R1 in the Formula (I) represents biaryl groups optionally substituted with one to four Y, such as, for example, 4-thienyl phenyl group or 4-phenyl phenyl group, a compound represented by formula (xi-f) can be produced by conducting a reaction using a compound represented by formula (xi-e) by a process of Suzuki-Miyaura coupling similar to that described in published documents, for example, Miyaura, N, et. al., Tetrahedron Lett., 1979, 3437, J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 1979, 866, Chem. Rev. 1995, 95, 2457, in the presence of catalyst such as palladium-carbon (Pd—C), Raney-Ni, or platinum oxide (PtO2), and in the presence of a base such as potassium tert-buthoxide, sodium hydride, lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium carbonate, sodium carbonate, or potassium carbonate with a corresponding arylboronic acid using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as water, acetone, toluene, dioxane or tetrahydrofuran, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
When R4 represents 1-imino-2,3-dihydroisoindol-5-yl group, or its heteroaryl analogue wherein M represents nitrogen atom, are optionally substituted with one to four Y, which is shown as a partial structure of a compound represented by formula (xii-b) in Scheme 10 or its analogue, a compound represented by formula (xii-b) can be produced from a compound represented by formula (xii-a) which is identical to the compound represented by formula (ix-d) in the Scheme 5, wherein its R is hydrogen atom, and from a compound 39-2 (N-[(5-Amino-2-cyanophenyl)-methyl]-N-[(2-methylpropan-2-yl) oxycarbonyl]carbamate) which is described in Experimental section 39. A compound represented by formula (ix-d) is converted to its analogous compound of 39-3 in the Example 39 procedure similar to that used in <Step 5-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2), which is followed by the conversion to compounds analogous to compounds 39-4, 39-5 and 39-6 by a process similar to that used in <Step 10-1> of (Reaction Scheme 5), <Step 10-2> of (Reaction Scheme 6) and deprotection of Boc group by a process similar to that used in the Experimental section Example 38-6 or by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme). A compound represented by formula (xii-b) can be produced with resulting amine compound analogous to the compound 39-6 by a process similar to that described in the Experimental section 39 [ step 39-7] using alcoholic solvent, other solvent or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (ix-d) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 5-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using compounds represented by formula (viii-d) and represented by formula (ix-c). When R represents tert-butyl group, a compound represented by formula (ix-c) could be prepared by a similar process that described in published document, for example, Tetrahedron, 45, 3071-3080, 1989.
A compound represented by formula (xiii-a) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 10-1> of (Reaction Scheme 5) using a compound represented by formula (ix-d), and followed by the similar process as that used in <step 10-2> of (Reaction Scheme 6) using the resulting alcoholic compound from a compound represented by formula (ix-d).
A compound represented by formula (xiii-b) can be produced from a compound represented by formula (xiii-a) by a well-known or similar process that described in published documents, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 22, Organic synthesis IV, Acids, amino acids, and peptides, pp. 1-43, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., in the presence of inorganic or organic acids such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, hemisulfuric, phosphoric, methanesulfonic, benzenesulfonic, p-toluenesulfonic, 4-bromobenzenesulfonic, cyclohexylamidosulfonic, trifluoromethylsulfonic, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic, acetic, oxalic, tartaric, succinic, glycerolphosphoric, lactic, malic, adipic, citric, fumaric, maleic, gluconic, glucuronic, palmitic or trifluoroacetic acid using water and a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, N,N-dimethylformamide, dioxane, or tetrahydrofuran, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (xiii-d) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 5-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (xiii-b) via its intermediate represented by formula (xiii-c), with a compound represented by formula (v-b).
Protective groups of a compound represented by formula (xiii-d) can be introduced and removed between (xiii-d) and (xiii-e) by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme).
A compound represented by formula (xiii-f), which is identical to the compound represented by formula (x-e) in Scheme 6 wherein m is 1 and R is hydrogen atom, can be produced by a similar process as that used in <Step 10-4> of (Reaction Scheme 6) using a compound represented by formula (xiii-d).
A compound represented by formula (xiv-b) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 5-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (xiv-a).
A compound represented by formula (xiv-c) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 10-4> of (Reaction Scheme 6) using a compound represented by formula (xiv-b).
A compound represented by formula (xiv-d) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 5-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (xiv-a) and corresponding sulfonyl halide such as sulfonyl chloride reagent.
A compound represented by formula (xiv-e) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 10-4> of (Reaction Scheme 6) using a compound represented by formula (xiv-d).
A compound represented by formula (xiv-f) wherein each M represents independently oxygen atom, nitrogen atom or carbon atom, can be produced with step by step cyclization process as that used in <Step 5-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (xiv-a) and a compound represented by formula (xiv-i) denoting acid halide or acid reagent wherein X represents halogen or hydroxyl group, such as 2-chloroethoxy acetic acid.
The resulting compound represented by formula (xiv-f) can be cyclized to produce a compound represented by formula (xiv-g) by the same process as that used in <Step 10-2> of (Reaction Scheme 6).
A compound represented by formula (xiv-g) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 10-4> of (Reaction Scheme 6) using a compound represented by formula (xiv-f).
A compound represented by formula (xv-a) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 10-2> of (Reaction Scheme 6) using a compound represented by formula (ix-f) in the Scheme 5.
A compound represented by formula (xv-b), a key intermediate to produce compounds represented by formula (xv-f) which corresponds to the compounds represented by Formula (I), can be produced by deprotection of the compound represented by formula (xv-a) using CAN (ceric ammonium nitrate) using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as a polar solvent, e.g., DMF, DMSO, ethyl acetate, water, or acetonitril, or an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, 1,4-dioxane, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature, or by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme).
A compound represented by formula (xv-c) can be produced by allowing a key intermediate compound represented by formula (xv-b) to react with a compound represented by R1-X (aryl halide or heteroaryl halide, wherein X represents halogen atom) by a process known as Goldberg reaction which are similar to that described in published documents, for example, JACS, 2002, 124, 7421 in the presence of a base such as potassium phosphate, cesium carbonate, potassium tert-buthoxide, sodium hydride, lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium carbonate, sodium carbonate, or potassium carbonate in the presence of 1,2-diamine ligand such as trans-1,2-cyclohexanediamine, trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine, or ethylene diamine, and in the presence of catalytic amount of cupper iodide using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an ethereal solvent, e.g., diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, 1,4-dioxane, polar solvents such as DMF, and DMSO; or an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, e.g., toluene or benzene or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of room temperature to the solvent-reflux temperature.
A compound represented by formula (xv-c) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (xv-b) to react with acetic anhydride by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Jikken Kagaku Koza (Experimental Chemistry Series), 4th edition, 22, Organic synthesis IV, Acids, amino acids, and peptides, pp. 191-309, 1992, Maruzen Co., Ltd., and resulting acetylated alcohol compound can be hydrolyzed by the similar process as that used in <Step 4-2> of (Reaction Scheme 2).
A compound represented by formula (xv-e) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 5-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (xv-d) in the Scheme 13 and a compound represented by formula (v-b).
A compound represented by formula (xv-f) can be produced by a similar process as that used in <Step 10-4> of (Reaction Scheme 6) using a compound represented by formula (xv-e).
A compound represented by formula (xvi-a) are commercially available, or capable of being readily synthesized by the method as identical to the route described in Scheme 1 to synthesize a compound represented by formula (II-b), or commonly used in the organic chemistry from commercially available products.
A compound represented by formula (xvi-b) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 2-3> of (Reaction Scheme 1) using a compound represented by formula (xvi-a) in the Scheme 14.
A compound represented by formula (xvi-c) can be produced by a similar process as that used in <Step 2-2> of (Reaction Scheme 1) using a compound represented by formula (xvi-b) in the Scheme 14.
A compound represented by formula (xvi-d) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 3-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (xvi-c) in the Scheme 14.
A compound represented by formula (xvi-e) can be produced by a similar process as that used in <Step 2-2> of (Reaction Scheme 1) using a compound represented by formula (xvi-d) in the Scheme 14.
A compound represented by formula (xvi-f) can be produced by the similar process as that used in <Step 5-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (xvi-e) in the Scheme 14 when R5 represents acyl group such as, for example, acetyl group or benzyl group.
A compound represented by formula (xvi-g) can be produced by a similar process as that used in <Step 1-6> of (Reaction Scheme 1) using a compound represented by formula (xvi-f) in the Scheme 14.
A compound represented by formula (xvi-h) can be produced by a similar process as that used in <Step 5-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (xvi-g) in the Scheme 14.
A compound represented by formula (xvi-i) can be produced by a similar process as that used in <Step 5-2> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (xvi-h) in the Scheme 14.
A compound represented by formula (xvii-b) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (xvii-a) to react with TMSCN(trimethylsilyl cyanide) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Organic synthesis Collective Vol. 1, pp. 336 (1941), Collective Vol. 2, pp. 7 (1943), Collective Vol. 7, pp. 521 (1990) using a solvent which is inactive to the reaction, such as an alcoholic solvent, e.g., methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of −78° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature. P1-3 represents typically a benzyl group and deprotection of benzyl group can be reductive deprotection by a similar process of <step 8-1>.
A compound represented by formula (xvii-c) can be produced by allowing a compound represented by formula (xvii-b) by a process similar to that described in published documents, for example, Organic synthesis Collective Vol. 1, pp. 270 (1941), Collective Vol. 2, pp. 310 (1943) in the presence of concentrated HCl using a solvent such as an alcoholic solvent containing hydrogen chloride, e.g., methanol-HCl, ethanol-HCl, or a mixed solvent thereof at a temperature in the range of 0° C. to the solvent-reflux temperature.
Protective groups of a compound represented by formula (xvii-c) can be introduced and removed by techniques which are well-known or described here (see Greene, T. W., et. al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2007), 4th Ed., Wiley, New York, or Kocienski, P., Protecting Groups (1994), Thieme).
A compound represented by formula (xvii-e) can be produced by the same process as that used in <Step 4-3> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (xvii-c) and a compound represented by formula (v-b).
A compound represented by formula (xvii-g) can be produced by a similar process as that used in <Step 1-6> of (Reaction Scheme 1) using a compound represented by formula (xvii-c) in the Scheme 15.
A compound represented by formula (xvii-e) can be produced by the same process as that used in <Step 5-1> of (Reaction Scheme 2) using a compound represented by formula (xvii-g) and a compound represented by formula (v-b).
A compound represented by formula (xvii-f) can be produced by the same process as that used in <step 14-1> or <step 14-3> of (Reaction Scheme 12), or <step 15-3> of (Reaction Scheme 13) using a compound represented by formula (xvii-f).
A compound represented by formula (xvii-h) can be produced by a similar process as that used in <Step 10-4> of (Reaction Scheme 6) using a compound represented by formula (xvii-g).
(S,S), (R,S) and (S,R) forms of compounds represented by Formula (I) can also be made from corresponding starting materials. The required starting materials for the synthesis of (S,S), (R,S) and (S,R) isoforms of compound (ix-a) are either commercially available, or capable of being readily synthesized by the method commonly used in the organic chemistry from commercially available products.
Acidic or basic products of the compound of the Formula (I) can be present in the form of their salts or in free form. Pharmacologically acceptable salts are preferred, for example alkali metal or alkaline earth metal salts such as hydrochlorides, hydrobromides, sulfates, hemisulfates, all possible phosphates, and salts of the amino acids, natural bases or carboxylic acids.
The preparation of pharmacologically acceptable salts from compounds of the Formula (I) capable of salt formation, including their stereoisomeric forms is carried out in a manner known per se. With basic reagents such as hydroxides, carbonates, hydrogencarbonates, alkoxides and ammonia or organic bases, for example, trimethyl- or triethylamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine or triethanolamine, trometamol or alternatively basic amino acids, for example lysine, ornithine or arginine, the compounds of the Formula (I) form stable alkali metal, alkaline earth metal or optionally substituted ammonium salts. If the compounds of the Formula (I) have basic groups, stable acid addition salts can also be prepared using strong acids. For this, inorganic and organic acids such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, hemisulfuric, phosphoric, methanesulfonic, benzenesulfonic, p-toluenesulfonic, 4-bromobenzenesulfonic, cyclohexylamidosulfonic, trifluoromethylsulfonic, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic, acetic, oxalic, tartaric, succinic, glycerolphosphoric, lactic, malic, adipic, citric, fumaric, maleic, gluconic, glucuronic, palmitic or trifluoroacetic acid are suitable.
The present invention will now be described in more detail using examples, but the present invention is not limited to the examples.
The measurement of nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectrum (Table 3) was performed using a JEOL JNM-ECX300 FT-NMR (manufactured by JEOL Ltd.) or a JEOL JNM-ECX400 FT-NMR (manufactured by JEOL Ltd.).
Liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry (LC-MS, Table 4) was performed using a Waters FractionLynx MS system (manufactured by Waters Corporation) from the Example 1 to Example 67. A SunFire Column™ (4.6 mm×5 cm, 5 microm) (manufactured by Waters Corporation) was used as an analytical column. A SunFire Column™ (19 mm×5 cm, 5 microm) (manufactured by Waters Corporation) was used as a preparative column. Acetonitrile and a 0.05% aqueous acetic acid solution or 0.05% aqueous trifluoroacetic acid solution were used as the mobile phase. Methanol and 0.05% aqueous acetic acid solution or 0.05% aqueous trifluoroacetic acid solution were also used as the mobile phase. The analysis was performed under the following gradient conditions: acetonitrile: 0.05% aqueous acetic acid solution or 0.05% aqueous trifluoroacetic acid solution=1:9 (0 minutes), 9:1 (5 minutes), and 9:1 (7 minutes). Methanol: 0.05% aqueous acetic acid solution or 0.05% aqueous trifluoroacetic acid solution=1:9 (0 minutes), 10:0 (5 minutes), and 10:0 (7 minutes). The solvent systems are described as the followings: A indicates MeCN—AcOH, B indicates MeCN-TFA, C indicates MeOH—AcOH, and D indicates MeOH-TFA.
Column: Phenomenex Gemini C18, 50×4.6 mm, 5 micron
Column: Zorbax SB-C-18; 1.8 micron
I: Instrument: Agilent Technologies 6140; Column: Agilent SBC (3.0×50 mm, 1.8 u); Flow: 1.0 ml/min; solvent A: H2O-0.1% TFA: Solvent B: ACN-0.1% TFA; Gradient Table: 0.1 min: 5% B, 2.3 min: 99% B, 2.90 min: 99% B, 3.0 min: 5% B stop time 3.50 min.
J: Agilent Technologies 6140; Column: Agilent SBC (3.0×50 mm, 1.8 u); Flow: 1.0 ml/min; solvent A: H2O-0.1% TFA: Solvent B: ACN-0.1% TFA; Gradient Table: 0 min: 10% B, 1.5 min: 95% B, 2.76 min: 10% B, stop time 3.60 min, Post Time 0.70 min.
K: Instrument: PE-Sciex API 150 EX; Column. Alltech Platinum C18, 33×7 mm, 3 micron; SolventA: Water w/0.05% TFA; SolventB: Acetonitrile w/0.05% TFA; Flow rate: 1 mL/min; Gradient: 0 min: 10% B, 5 min: 95% B, 7 min: 95% B, 7.5 min: 10, 9 min: stop.
Column: Phenomenex Gemini C18, 50×4.6 mm, 5 micron
Column: Agilent SBC (3.0×50 mm, 1.8 u); Flow: 1.0 ml/min; solvent A: H2O-0.1%
TFA: Solvent B: ACN-0.1% TFA; Gradient Table: 0.1 min: 5% B, 2.3 min: 99% B, 2.90 min: 99% B, 3.0 min: 5% B stop time 3.50 min.
Deuterated starting materials are capable of being used in certain Examples.
To a solution of 4-(4-Methylphenyl)-3-morpholinone (Zhurnal Organicheskoi Khimii, 6(6), 1305-8, 1970) (1.08 g) in THF (21.6 ml), was added 1 M lithium hexamethyldisilazide solution (7.34 ml) in THF at −78° C. The mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 15 minutes then 0° C. for 1 hour. Then the reaction mixture was cooled down at −78° C. and ethyl glyoxylate solution (1.84 ml) in toluene was added into the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. overnight. At the end of the reaction, saturated NH4Cl aqueous solution was added into the reaction mixture. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the resulting mixture was extracted with AcOEt. The organic layer was washed with brine and dried with anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was purified by silica gel flash column chromatography (eluent: n-Hex/AcOEt=50/50-0/100) to obtain two diastereomers, compound 1-1 (LP) (405 mg; Rf value=0.36 on TLC (n-Hex/AcOEt=1/2)) as a pale yellow amorphous solid and 1-1 (MP) (287 mg; Rf value=0.27 on TLC (n-Hex/AcOEt=1/2)) as yellow oil. LP indicates a less polar spot on TLC, MP indicates a more polar spot on TLC.
To a solution of compound 1-1 (LP) (100 mg) in EtOH (1 mL), was added 1 N NaOH aqueous solution (1 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Then DowEx®-50Wx8-200 was added into the reaction mixture, then the mixture was filtered to remove DowEx®-50Wx8-200. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to obtain compound 1-2 (90 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid. Compound 1-2 was used in the next step without further purification.
To a solution of compound 1-2 (90 mg) in THF (2 ml), were added activated-charcoal (4.5 mg) and triphosgene (403 mg) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 hours. Then activated-charcoal was removed by filtration and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was resolved in CH2Cl2 (2 ml). 6-Amino-1-bis(tert-butoxyl carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline (146 mg) was added into the CH2Cl2 solution at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and a half volume of the resulting residue was purified by LC/MS to obtain compound 1-3 (30.6 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 1-3 (30.6 mg) in CH2Cl2 (1.5 ml), was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.5 ml) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. To the resulting residue, Et2O was added and the residue was triturated. Then the precipitate was collected by filtration to obtain EXAMPLE 1 (19.3 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for Example 1, 4-aminobenzonitrile (17.8 mg) was used instead of 6-amino-1-bis(tert-butyl carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline to obtain compound 2-1 (24 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
HCl gas was bubbled into a solution of compound 2-1 (15 mg) in MeOH—CH2Cl2 (10-6 ml) at 0° C. for 30 minutes. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. overnight to form the methyl imidate. Then the mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the resulting residue was solved in MeOH (8 mL). Ammonium carbonate (39 mg) was added into the above MeOH solution at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 hours. Then 8N NH3-MeOH (2 ml) was added into the reaction mixture and the mixture was stirred at 60° C. for 6 hours until the methyl imidate intermediate disappeared. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the resulting residue was purified by LC/MS to obtain EXAMPLE 2 (14.5 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
The following compounds were synthesized from compound 1-2 in a similar manner to compound 1-3 using an appropriate amine instead of 6-amino-1-bis(tert-butoxycarbonyl)aminoisoquinoline, and using DMF instead of CH2Cl2.
To a solution of 4-methylaniline (100 mg) in MeOH (2.0 mL) was added 40% chroloacetaldehyde solution in water (0.17 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred for 45 minutes at the same temperature, sodium borohydride (NaBH4; 70.6 mg) was added into the reaction mixture at one portion and the mixture was stirred for 1 hour.
The reaction mixture was diluted with water and was extracted with EtOAc. The extract was washed with water, sat.NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was dried with anhyd. Na2SO4. It was filtrated to remove insoluble matters and it was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel flush chromatography (eluent:Hexane:EtOAc=95:5˜75:25) to obtain 7-1 (27 mg) as brown oil.
To a solution of (+)-Diacetyl-L-tartaric anhydride (9.15 g) in dry DMF (100 mL), was added 4-aminobenzonitrile (5 g,) under ice cooling and the reaction mixture was stirred to obtain compound 7-2 at room temperature overnight. The solution of compound 7-2 was used in the next step without any treatment.
The above DMF solution of 7-2 (13.8 mL) was diluted with CH2Cl2 (13.8 mL). The internal temperature of the mixture was kept below −60° C. over all additions with dry ice bath.
Oxalyl chloride (0.55 mL) in CH2Cl2 (1.7 mL) was added dropwise into the reaction mixture. After stirring for 1 hour, pyridine (1.99 mL) was added dropwise thereto and stirred for 15 min. Then 7-1 (0.99 g) in CH2Cl2 (6 mL) was added dropwise into the reaction mixture. The mixture was stirred below −60° C. for 20 min, then it was stirred at −30° C. for 15 hours.
The reaction mixture was quenched with water and was extracted with EtOAc. The extract was washed with water, 1N HCl, sat.NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was dried with anhyd. Na2SO4. It was filtrated and was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel flush chromatography (eluent:Hexane:EtOAc=75:25˜25:75) to obtain 7-3 (1.70 g) as a light brown solid.
To a solution of 7-3 (0.20 g) in MeOH (4 mL), was added 8N NH3/MeOH (0.26 mL) at 0° C. and the mixture was stirred for 10 minutes in the same temperature. The mixture was concentrated and was dried in vacuo to obtain crude 7-4. The crude 7-4 was used in the next step without further purification.
The crude 7-4 was dissolved in t-BuOH (12 mL)-DMSO (8 mL), and t-BuOK (554 mg) was added portionwise into the reaction mixture at 0° C. The mixture was stirred for 10 minutes in the same temperature.
To the reaction mixture was added 1N HCl and Et2O to obtain precipitate. Then the precipitate was collected by filtration, was rinsed with water, was washed with Et2O and was dried in vacuo to obtain 7-5 (603 mg) as a white solid.
Compound 7-5 (27 mg) was suspended in MeOH (15 mL)-CH2Cl2 (7 mL). The suspension was saturated with HCl gas by bubbling at 0° C. for 0.5 hours. Then the mixture was stood to form the imidate at the same temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was concentrated and was dried in vacuo to obtain crude imidate. The crude imidate was dissolved in MeOH (10 mL), then 8N NH3-MeOH (2 mL) was added into the above MeOH solution. The reaction mixture was stirred in sealed tube at 80° C. for 3 hours to convert EXAMPLE 7. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 day at room temperature then it was concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was dissolved in 1N HCl-MeOH, then the mixture was purified by preparative LC/MS to obtain EXAMPLE 7 (7 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 2,4-dimethylaniline (7 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 8-1 (2.8 g) as pale brown oil.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 8-1 (1.65 g) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 8-2 (480 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 8-2 (0.15 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 8-3. The crude 8-3 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 8-3 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 8-4 (70 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 8-4 (50 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 8 (11.7 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 4-methyl-3-nitroaniline (7 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 9-1 (1.63 g) as pale yellow oil.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 9-1 (1.61 g) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 9-2 (2.88 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 9-2 (0.9 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 9-3. The crude 9-3 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 9-3 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 9-4 (70 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 9-4 (70 mg) in AcOH—H2O (2 mL-0.1 mL), was added electrolytic iron powder (95.3 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour then at 40° C. for 2 hours to complete the reaction. The reaction mixture was filtered with Celite® pad to remove iron powder. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was purified by amino-silica gel flash column chromatography (eluent: CH2Cl2/MeOH=98/2-95/5) to obtain compound 9-5 (30 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 9-5 (16.5 mg) in CH2Cl2 (1 mL), were added triethylamine (6.7 microL) and acetoxyacetyl chloride (5.1 microL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. Then EtOAc and water were added into the mixture and it was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with H2O, 1N HCl, sat. NaHCO3 aq. and brine, respectively and dried with anhydr. Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound 9-6 (20 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 9-6 (20 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 9 (0.8 mg) as a colorless amorophous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 4-(thiophen-3-yl)aniline (50 mg) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 10-1 (15 mg) a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 10-1 (160 mg) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 10-2 (122 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 10-2 (115 mg) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 10-3. The crude 10-3 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 10-3 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 10-4 (46 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 10-4 (45 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 10 (8.2 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 4-tert-butylaniline (5 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 11-1 (4.8 g) as pale brown oil.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 11-1 (2.28 g) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 11-2 (1.19 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 11-2 (0.3 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 11-3. The crude 11-3 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 11-3 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 11-4 (115 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 11-4 (0.11 g) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 11 (30.9 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 4-hydroxymethylaniline (1 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 12-1 (690 mg) as pale yellow oil.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 12-1 (2 g) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 12-2 (1.91 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 12-2 (0.2 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 12-3. The crude 12-3 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 12-3 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 12-4 (80 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 12-4 (73 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 12 (16.6 mg) a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 5-amino-2-indolinone (0.46 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 13-1 (470 mg) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 13-1 (0.47 g) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 13-2 (330 mg) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 13-2 (100 mg) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 13-3. The crude 13-3 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7 crude 13-3 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 13-4 (40 mg) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 13-4 (0.76 g) was used instead of compound 7-5, to obtain EXAMPLE 13 (8 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7,4-iodoaniline (10 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 14-1 (2.5 g) as colorless oil.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 14-1 (2.39 g) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 14-2 (2.4 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 14-2 (0.3 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 14-3. The crude 14-3 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 14-3 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 14-4 (160 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 14-4 (80 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 14 (11 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 4-cyclohexylaniline (0.9 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 15-1 (1.04 g) as brown oil.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 15-1 (1 g) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 15-2 (1.05 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 and 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 15-2 (1 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain compound 15-3 (610 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 15-3 (30 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 15 (1.8 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 4-isopropylaniline (1 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 16-1 (1.35 g) as brown oil.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 16-1 (1.3 g) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 16-2 (1.27 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 and 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 16-2 (1.2 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain compound 16-3 (570 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 16-3 (30 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 16 (1.8 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7,4-ethylaniline (5.15 mL) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain crude 17-1. The crude 17-1 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 17-1 (2.31 g) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 17-2 (1.57 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 17-2 (1.5 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 17-3. The crude 17-3 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 17-3 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 17-4 (0.76 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 17-4 (0.1 g) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 17 (5 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 6-(2-hydroxyethyl)aminoindole (1.99 g; EP424261A1) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 18-1 (620 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 18-1 (0.3 g) in CH2Cl2 (9 mL), were added triethylamine (127 microL) and mesylchloride (51.9 microL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 20 minutes. Then EtOAc and water were added into the mixture and it was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with H2O, 1N HCl, sat. NaHCO3 aq, and brine. Then it was dried with anhyd. Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound 18-2 (350 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid. Compound 18-2 was used in the next step without further purification.
To a solution of compound 18-2 (0.34 g) in MeOH (10.2 mL), was added K2CO3 (272 mg) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. overnight. Then 1N HCl (2 mL), H2O (5 mL) and Et2O (15 mL) were added into the reaction mixture. The precipitate was collected by filtration and was rinsed with H2O and Et2O to obtain compound 18-3 (40 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 18-3 (50 mg) in EtOH—H2O (10 mL-2.5 mL), were added triethylamine (143 microL) and hydroxyl-amine hydrochloride salt (71.2 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at 80° C. in a sealed tube for 20 hours. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue which include hydroxyamidine compound (54 mg) was solved in AcOH-MeOH (1 mL-9 mL) and 10% palladium-charcoal (54 mg) was added into the above mixture. The reaction mixture was stirred under hydrogen gas atmosphere at room temperature overnight. After confirming the completion of the reaction by LC/MS, Pd—C was removed by filtration with Celite® pad. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the resulting residue was purified by prep LC/MS to obtain EXAMPLE 18 (4.2 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 6-amino-1,3-dihydro-3,3-dimethyl-2H-indol-2-one (1 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 19-1 (1.05 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 19-1 (1 g) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 19-2 (0.39 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 19-2 (0.38 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 19-3. The crude 19-3 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 19-3 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 19-4 (190 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 19-4 (50 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 19 (18 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
To a suspension of 5-amino-1,3-dihydro-2H-benzimidazol-2-one (1 g) and K2CO3 (1.02 g) in DMF (20 mL), was added dropwise a solution of chloroacetylchloride (0.59 mL) in DMF (10 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. Then the mixture was diluted with water to precipitate. The precipitate was collected by filtration, rinsed with H2O to obtain compound 20-1 (1.2 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a suspension of compound 20-1 (1 g) in THF (10 mL), was added dropwise 1M BH3-THF complex at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours to complete the reaction. Then MeOH was carefully added to decompose an excess of BH3 and then conc. HCl was added at 0° C. After stirring under reflux condition for 20 minutes, the mixture was diluted with water. It was extracted with EtOAc and the organic layer was washed with brine and dried with anhyd. Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound 20-2 (0.85 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 20-2 (0.8 g) was used instead of compound 7-2 to obtain compound 20-3 (1.6 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 20-3 (1.6 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 20-4. The crude 20-4 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 20-4 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 20-5 (100 mg) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 20-5 (50 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 20 (8 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 and 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 4-methylbenzylamine (1.04 mL) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 21-1 (62 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 21-1 (60 mg) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 21-2. The crude 21-2 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 21-2 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 21-3 (13 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 21-3 (12 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 21 (2 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
To a suspension of compound 14-4 (80 mg) in THF—H2O (2 mL-0.67 mL), were added 2-thiopheneboronic acid (43 mgl), Cs2CO3 (0.44 g), and Pd(Ph3P)4 (19.4 mg). The mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 15 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered with Celite® pad and rinsed with the mixed solvent (EtOAc-MeOH=1-1). The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the resulting residue was washed with H2O and Et2O. The precipitate was collected by filtration to obtain compound 22-1 (35 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 22-1 (25 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 22 (1.4 mg) a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 22-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 22, phenyl boronic acid (41 mg) was used instead of 2-thiopheneboronic acid to obtain compound 23-1 (42 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 23-1 (25 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 23 (4.2 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 22-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 22, 4-tert-butylphenyl boronic acid (60 mg) was used instead of 2-thiopheneboronic acid to obtain compound 24-1 (65 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 24-1 (35 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 24 (8 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 22-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 22, 1-Boc-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyrazole (98 mg) was used instead of 2-thiopheneboronic acid to obtain compound 25-1 (36 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 25-1 (32 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 25 (6.4 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline (11.6 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 26-1 (3.2 g) as a yellow brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 26-1 (3.2 g) was used instead of compound 7-1 to obtain compound 26-2 (3.2 g) as colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 26-2 (3.2 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 26-3. The crude 26-3 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 26-3 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 26-4 (1.68 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To compound 26-4 (1.65 g), was added trifluoroacetic acid (10 mL) with anisole (0.2 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour then Et2O was added into the mixture to precipitate. The precipitate was collected by filtration and washed with Et2O. Then the precipitate was solved in water and the solution was basified with sat. NaHCO3 aq. The precipitate was collected by filtration and washed with H2O to obtain compound 26-5 (1.2 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
To a suspension of compound 26-5 (70 mg) in pyridine (1 mL), was added Ac2O (43.4 microL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with water to precipitate. The precipitate was collected by filtration and rinsed with water to obtain compound 26-6 (85 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 26-6 (50 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 26 (2 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline (15 g) was used instead of 5-amino-1,3-dihydro-2H-benzimidazol-2-one to obtain compound 26-7 (19.5 g) as a gray amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, compound 26-7 (4 g) was used instead of compound 20-1 to obtain compound 26-1 (3.84 g).
To a solution of (+)-diacetyl-L-tartaric anhydride (3.01 g) in CH2Cl2 (40 mL), was added compound 26-1 (3.77 g) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound 26-9 (7.41 g) as a gray amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 26-9 (4 g) in CH2Cl2 (40 mL), were added 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one (1.46 g; EP1574516 A1), 1-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate (HOBt-H2O; 0.13 g), and WSC—HCl (1.73 g). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 hours and it was concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was solved in EtOAc, the organic layer was washed with brine and dried with anhyd. Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was suspended in Hex-Et2O=1-1. The precipitate was collected by filtration and rinsed with the above solvent to obtain compound 26-10 (4.45 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 26-10 (3.5 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain compound 26-11 (3.04 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 26-11 (2.8 g) was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 26-12 (1.24 g) as an ivory weight amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 26-12 (1 g) was used instead of compound 26-4 to obtain compound 26-13 (830 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 26-13 (0.1 g) was used instead of compound 26-5 to obtain compound 26-14 (83 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a suspension of compound 26-14 (80 mg) in MeOH-1N HCl (8 mL-8 mL), was added 10% Pd—C (80 mg) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred under H2 gas atmosphere at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered with Celite® pad. The Celite® pad was washed with DMF and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was suspended in MeOH and the precipitate was collected by filtration to obtain EXAMPLE 26 (38 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 26-5 (70 mg) in AcOH—H2O (6 mL-2 mL), was added a solution of potassium cyanate (KOCN; 31 mg) in water (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 40-50° C. for 3 hours and at room temperature overnight to precipitate. The resulting precipitate was collected by filtration, rinsed with waster and dried in vacuo to obtain compound 27-1 (70 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 27-1 (50 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 27 (3 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 26-5 (70 mg) in DMF-pyridine (2 mL-2 mL), was added mesyl chloride (16.3 microL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was diluted with water then it was extracted with EtOAc. The extract was washed with water, 1N HCl and brine. The organic layer was dried with anhyd. Na2SO4 and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound 28-1 (30 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 28-1 (28 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 28 (4.9 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 28-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 28, compound 26-13 (0.1 g) was used instead of compound 26-5 to obtain compound 28-2 (50 mg) as a pale pink amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 28-2 (50 mg) was used instead of compound 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 28 (32 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, chlorobutyryl chloride (33.6 microL) was used instead of acetyl chloride to obtain an acylated intermediate. After confirming the formation of it by LC/MS, tBuOK (91.9 mg) was added to the above solution. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature and for 2 hours. Then the mixture was diluted with water and it was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with H2O, 1N HCl, and brine. The organic layer was dried with anhyd. Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound 29-1 (73 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 29-1 (67 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 29 (6.6 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 29-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 29, compound 26-13 (0.1 g) was used instead of compound 26-5 to obtain compound 29-2 (68 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 29-2 (65 mg) was used instead of compound 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 29 (23 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a suspension of compound 26-5 (0.1 g) and 2-chloroethoxy acetic acid (45.4 mg) in DMF (2 mL), was added 4-(4,6-dimethoxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-4-methylmorpholinium chloride (DMT-MM; 87.7 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. Then, according to the Step 29-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 29, cyclization reaction was pursued to obtain compound 30-1 (90 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 30-1 (85 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 30 (15.7 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 30-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 30, compound 26-13 (0.1 g) was used instead of compound 26-5 to obtain compound 30-2 (42 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 30-2 (40 mg) was used instead of compound 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 30 (26.7 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 29-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 29, 2-chloroethyl chloroformate (31 microL) was used instead of chlorobutyryl chloride to obtain compound 31-1 (76 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 31-1 (70 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 31 (10.1 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 28-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 28, (benzyloxy)acetyl chloride (94.8 microL) was used instead of mesyl chloride to obtain compound 32-1 (160 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 32-1 (150 mg) was used instead of compound 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 32 (150 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a solution of EXAMPLE 32 (0.12 g) in MeOH—AcOH (20 mL-1 mL), was added 10% Pd—C (20 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred under H2 gas atmosphere at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered to remove Pd—C and the filtrate was purified by prep. LC/MS. Before collecting the fractions, conc. HCl was added into each fraction to obtain EXAMPLE 33 (2 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 3,3-dimethyl-1H-indol-2-one (0.5 g; J. Med. Chem., 51, 4465-4475, 2008) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 34-1 (0.68 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-9 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 34-1 (680 mg) was used instead of compound 26-1 to obtain crude 34-2. The crude 34-2 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 26-10 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, crude 34-2 was used instead of compound 26-9 to obtain compound 34-3 (1.26 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 34-3 (0.4 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain compound 34-4 (356 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 34-4 (0.12 g) was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 34-5 (20.1 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 34-5 (19 mg) was used instead of compound 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 34 (16.4 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, 5-aminoindole (5.31 g) was used instead of 5-amino-1,3-dihydro-2H-benzimidazol-2-one to obtain compound 35-1 (8.38 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, compound 35-1 (1 g) was used instead of compound 20-1 to obtain compound 35-2 (930 mg) as brown oil.
According to the Step 26-9 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 35-2 (327 mg) was used instead of compound 26-8 to obtain crude 35-3. The crude 35-3 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 26-10 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, crude 35-3 was used instead of compound 26-9 to obtain compound 35-4 (0.47 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 35-4 (0.2 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 35-5. The crude 35-5 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 35-5 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain 35-6 (65 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 35-6 (20 mg) was used instead of compound 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 35 (13.6 mg) as pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 6-amino-2-benzoxazolinone (0.5 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 36-1 (0.68 g) as brown oil.
According to the Step 26-9 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 36-1 (0.67 g) was used instead of compound 26-8 to obtain crude 36-2. The crude 36-2 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 26-10 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, crude 36-2 was used instead of compound 26-9 to obtain compound 36-3 (0.1 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 36-3 (98 mg) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 36-4. The crude 36-4 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 36-4 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain 36-5 (23 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 36-5 (21 mg) was used instead of compound 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 36 (15.5 mg) as a yellow-green amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 6-amino-2,3-dihydro-1H-isoindol-1-one, (0.8 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 37-1 (0.36 g) as a orange amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-9 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 37-1 (353 mg) was used instead of compound 26-8 to obtain crude 37-2. The crude 37-2 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 26-10 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, crude 37-2 was used instead of compound 26-9 to obtain compound 37-3 (419 mg) as a brown solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 37-3 (0.3 g) was used instead of compound 7-3 to obtain crude 37-4. The crude 37-4 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, crude 37-4 was used instead of compound 7-4 to obtain compound 37-5 (38 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 37-5 (32.9 mg) was used instead of compound 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 37 (21.4 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, N-(4-aminophenyl)acetamide (10 g) was used instead of 4-methylaniline to obtain compound 38-1 (7.9 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-9 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 38-1 (7.5 g) was used instead of compound 26-1 to obtain compound 38-2 (15.1 g) as a beige amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 38-2 (0.7 g) in CH2Cl2-DMF (30-2 mL), was added oxalyl chloride (0.25 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 hour in the same temperature. Then the mixture was concentrated in vacuo to remove excess oxalyl chloride. The resulting residue was resolved in CH2Cl2 (20 mL) and pyridine (0.19 mL) was added to the above solution at 0° C. The mixture was stirred for 10 minutes at the same temperature and then a solution of 6-amino-1-bis(tert-butoxy carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline (0.52 g) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to the mixture at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 hour at 0° C., then for 2 days at room temperature. MeOH was added to the reaction mixture and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. Then sat. NaHCO3 aq. was added to residue and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water, brine and dried with anhyd. Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluent:Hexane/EtOAc=1/4) to obtain compound 38-3 (0.52 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 38-3 (0.5 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 38-4 (0.42 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 38-4 (0.4 g) and DMF were used instead of 7-4 and t-BuOH-DMSO to obtain compound 38-5 (0.13 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 38-5 (40 mg) in MeOH (0.4 mL), was added 4N—HCl/EtOAc (1 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 21 hours at room temperature. After the reaction, the precipitate was collected by filtration to obtain EXAMPLE 38 (22 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
To a suspension of 2-(bromomethyl)-4-nitro-benzonitrile (1.0 g: WO 2005082368 A1) and K2CO3 (1.1 g) in DMF (15 mL), were added di-tert-butyl imidodicarboxylate (1.17 g) and tetrabutylammonium iodide (0.15 g) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. Water was added into the mixture and it was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine and dried with anhyd. Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluent: Hexane/EtOAc=100/0-3/1) to obtain compound 39-1 (1.29 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 39-1 (0.3 g) in MeOH-THF (3 mL-3 mL), was added 10% Pd/C (30 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred under hydrogen atmosphere for 3 hours at room temperature. Then the reaction mixture was filtered with Celite® pad to remove catalyst. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to obtain compound 39-2 (0.27 g) as pale brown oil.
According to the Step 26-10 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 38-2 (3.0 g) and 39-2 (2.43 g) were used instead of 26-9 and 3-(4-Aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one to obtain compound 39-3 (5.25 g) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 39-3 (5.2 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 39-4 (4.3 g) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 39-4 (4.3 g) and DMF were used instead of 7-4 and t-BuOH-DMSO to obtain compound 39-5 (1.46 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, compound 39-5 (1.45 g) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain compound 39-6 (1.2 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
Compound 39-6 (1.2 g) was suspended in EtOH (30 mL) and the mixture was refluxed for 6 hours. After cooling, the precipitate was collected by filtration to obtain EXAMPLE 39 (0.95 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 28-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 28, propionyl chloride (15.1 microL) was used instead of mesyl chloride to obtain compound 40-1 (80.3 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 40-1 (70 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 40 (53.5 mg) as a pale beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 28-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 28, an acid chloride derived from cyclopropylacetic acid (15.2 mg) was used instead of mesyl chloride to obtain compound 41-1 (53.5 mg) as a pale beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, 41-1 (50 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 41 (45.5 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 28-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 28, cyclohexanecarbonyl chloride (20.6 microL) was used instead of mesyl chloride to obtain compound 42-1 (57.7 mg) as a pale beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, 42-1 (50 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 42 (35 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, 26-13 (49.7 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 43 (37.9 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, N-Boc-m-phenylenediamine (2 g) was used instead of 5-amino-1,3-dihydro-2H-benzimidazol-2-one to obtain compound 44-1 (2.35 g) as a gray amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, compound 44-1 (11.4 g) was used instead of 20-1 to obtain compound 44-2 (10.9 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-9 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, 44-2 (10.8 g) was used instead of 26-1 to obtain compound 44-3 (20.7 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-10 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 44-3 (10 g) was used instead of 26-9 to obtain compound 44-4 (13.5 g) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 44-4 (13.4 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 44-5 (12.9 g) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 44-5 (1 g) and DMF were used instead of 7-4 and t-BuOH-DMSO to obtain compound 44-6 (0.66 g) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, 44-6 (6.0 g) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain compound 44-7 (6.3 g) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 44-7 (75 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 44 (32.3 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, 44-7 (150 mg) was used instead of 26-5 to obtain compound 45-1 (80.8 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 45-1 (65 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 45 (34.9 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 29-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 29, compound 44-7 (150 mg) was used instead of 26-5 to obtain compound 46-1 (74.7 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 46-1 (65 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 46 (20.9 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 27-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 27, compound 44-7 (150 mg) was used instead of 26-5 to obtain compound 47-1 (51.3 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 47-1 (45 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 47 (23 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 29-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 29, compound 44-7 (150 mg) was used instead of 26-5 to obtain compound 48-1 (79.4 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 48-1 (65 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 48 (37.2 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 28-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 28, compound 44-7 (150 mg) was used instead of 26-5 to obtain compound 49-1 (28.6 mg) as a pale pink amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 49-1 (25 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 49 (10.1 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 28-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 28, compound 44-7 (150 mg) was used instead of 26-5 to obtain compound 50-1 (41.4 mg) as a pale pink amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 50-1 (38 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 50 (15 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 30-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 30, 44-7 (150 mg) was used instead of 26-5 to obtain compound 51-1 (46.8 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 51-1 (43 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 51 (9.8 mg) as a pale beige amorphous solid.
To a solution of (R,R)-2,3-bis(acetyloxy)-butanedioic acid mono tert-butyl ester (9 g: Tetrahedron, 45, 3071-3080, 1989) in CH2Cl2 (90 mL), were added compound 11-1 (6.6 g) and 1-ethyl-3-(3′-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 hours at room temperature. Then water was added into the mixture and it was extracted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried with anhyd. Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound 52-1 (15.8 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 52-1 (15.5 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 52-2 (13 g) as a brown oil.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 52-2 (12.8 g) was used instead of 7-4 to obtain compound 52-3 (4.85 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
Compound 52-3 (1.5 g) was resolved in 4N HCl-dioxane (30 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to obtain compound 52-4 (1.44 g) as a beige amorphous hygroscopic solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, 52-4 (0.38 g) was used instead of 1-2 to obtain compound 52-5 (92 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, 52-5 (91 mg) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 52 (60 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, 52-4 (0.38 g) and compound 39-2 (0.1 g) were used instead of 1-2 and 6-amino-1-bis(tert-butoxy carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline to obtain compound 53-1 (96 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, compound 53-1 (95 mg) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain compound 53-2 (63 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 39-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, compound 53-2 (63 mg) was used instead of 39-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 53 (52 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, 4-trifluoromethyl aniline (5 g) was used instead of 5-amino-1,3-dihydro-2H-benzimidazol-2-one to obtain compound 54-1 (6.94 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, compound 54-1 (3.5 g) was used instead of 20-1 to obtain compound 54-2 (3.36 g) as brown oil.
To a solution of (R,R)-2,3-bis(acetyloxy)-butanedioic acid mono tert-butyl ester (3.25 g: Tetrahedron, 45, 3071-3080, 1989) in CH2Cl2 (65 mL), were added oxalyl chloride (1.06 mL) and DMF (50 microL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then pyridine (3.82 mL) was added into the mixture at the same temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at the same temperature for 5 minutes. To the mixture, was added a solution of compound 54-2 (2.5 g) in CH2Cl2 (12.5 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred for 1 hour at the same temperature. Then the mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the resulting residue was suspended in water. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc and the organic layer was washed with 1N HCl aq., sat. NaHCO3 aq., brine, and it was dried with anhyd. Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound 54-3 (5.7 g) as brown oil.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 54-3 (5.5 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 54-4 (4.57 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 54-4 (3 g) was used instead of 7-4 to obtain compound 54-5 (220 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 54-5 (0.2 g) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 54-6 (128 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 54-6 (128 mg) was used instead of 1-2 to obtain compound 54-7 (107 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, 54-7 (50 mg) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 54 (28.3 mg) as a leaf green amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, 4-trifluoromethoxyaniline (5 g) was used instead of 5-amino-1,3-dihydro-2H-benzimidazol-2-one to obtain compound 55-1 (6.67 g) as a khaki amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, compound 55-1 (3.3 g) was used instead of 20-1 to obtain compound 55-2 (3.21 g) as brown oil.
According to the Step 54-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 54, compound 55-2 (3.05 g) was used instead of 54-2 to obtain compound 55-3 (6.51 g) as brown oil.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 55-3 (6.45 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 55-4 (5.39 g) as brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 55-4 (3 g) was used instead of 7-4 to obtain compound 55-5 (0.81 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 55-5 (0.6 g) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 55-6 (0.7 g) as brown oil.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 55-6 (0.3 g) was used instead of 1-2 to obtain compound 55-7 (157 mg) as a beige powder.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, compound 55-7 (50 mg) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 55 (28.5 mg) as a leaf green amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 55-6 (0.3 g) and 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one with DMF were used instead of 1-2 and 6-amino-1-bis(tert-butoxycarbonyl)aminoisoquinoline to obtain compound 56-1 (26 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 56-1 (23 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 56 (13.5 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, a cyclic carbonate analogue (0.15 g) derived from compound 55-6 and 39-2 (0.14 g) were used instead of 1-2 and 6-amino-1-bis(tert-butoxycarbonyl)aminoisoquinoline to obtain compound 57-1 (147 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, 57-1 (0.14 g) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain compound 57-2 (93 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 39-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, 57-3 (89 mg) was used instead of 39-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 57 (66.4 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, 4-bromoaniline (5 g) was used instead of 5-amino-1,3-dihydro-2H-benzimidazol-2-one to obtain compound 58-1 (7.28 g) as a gray amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, compound 58-1 (7 g) was used instead of 20-1 to obtain compound 58-2 (6.81 g) as brown oil.
According to the Step 54-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 54, compound 58-2 (6.06 g) was used instead of 54-2 to obtain compound 58-3 (13.2 g) as brown oil.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 58-3 (12.5 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 58-4 (10.7 g) as brown oil.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 58-4 (4 g) was used instead of 7-4 to obtain compound 58-5 (242 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 58-5 (0.22 g) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 58-6 (188 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 58-6 (150 mg) was used instead of 1-2 to obtain compound 58-7 (110 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, compound 58-7 (50 mg) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 58 (29.3 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, 4-fluoroaniline (2.65 g) was used instead of 5-amino-1,3-dihydro-2H-benzimidazol-2-one to obtain compound 59-1 (3.4 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, compound 59-1 (2 g) was used instead of 20-1 to obtain compound 59-2 (1.95 g) as colorless oil.
According to the Step 54-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 54, compound 59-2 (1.57 g) was used instead of 54-2 to obtain compound 59-3 (2.1 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 59-3 (2.1 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 59-4 (1.62 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 59-4 (1.62 g) and DMF were used instead of 7-4 and t-BuOH-DMSO to obtain compound 59-5 (400 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 59-5 (0.39 g) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 59-6 (330 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 59-6 (0.1 g) was used instead of 1-2 to obtain compound 59-7 (85 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, compound 59-7 (75 mg) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 59 (43 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, 4-chloroaniline (3.04 g) was used instead of 5-amino-1,3-dihydro-2H-benzimidazol-2-one to obtain compound 60-1 (4 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, compound 60-1 (2 g) was used instead of 20-1 to obtain compound 60-2 (1.95 g) as colorless oil.
According to the Step 54-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 54, compound 60-2 (1.87 g) was used instead of 54-2 to obtain compound 60-3 (2.2 g) as a light pink amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 60-3 (2.2 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 60-4 (1.78 g) as a light yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 60-4 (1.78 g) and DMF were used instead of 7-4 and t-BuOH-DMSO to obtain compound 60-5 (400 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 60-5 (0.39 g) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 60-6 (310 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 60-6 (0.1 g) was used instead of 1-2 to obtain compound 60-7 (75 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, compound 60-7 (65 mg) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 60 (40 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, 4-isopropoxyaniline (3.61 g) was used instead of 5-amino-1,3-dihydro-2H-benzimidazol-2-one to obtain compound 61-1 (3.6 g) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, compound 61-1 (1.8 g) was used instead of 20-1 to obtain compound 61-2 (1.7 g) as colorless oil.
According to the Step 54-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 54, compound 61-2 (1.69 g) was used instead of 54-2 to obtain compound 61-3 (2.86 g) as colorless oil.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 61-3 (2.8 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 61-4 (2.13 g) as pale yellow oil.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 61-4 (0.8 g) was used instead of 7-4 to obtain compound 61-5 (220 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 61-5 (0.21 g) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 61-6 (112 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 61-6 (0.1 g) was used instead of 1-2 to obtain compound 61-7 (71 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, compound 61-7 (59 mg) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 61 (19 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 7-1 (3 g) was used instead of 11-1 to obtain compound 62-1 (5.81 g) as pale yellow oil.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 62-1 (5.45 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 62-2 (4.7 g) as pale yellow oil.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 62-2 (2.5 g) was used instead of 7-4 to obtain compound 62-3 (1.02 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 62-3 (1 g) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 62-4 (777 mg) as a pale purple amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 62-4 (0.2 g) was used instead of 1-2 to obtain compound 62-5 (0.11 g) as a pale brown solid.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, compound 62-5 (0.1 g) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 62 (51.5 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, 4-fluoro-2-methylaniline (5 g) was used instead of 5-amino-1,3-dihydro-2H-benzimidazol-2-one to obtain compound 63-1 (8 g) as a gray amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, compound 63-1 (8 g) was used instead of 20-1 to obtain compound 63-2 (7.87 g) as brown oil.
According to the Step 54-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 54, compound 63-2 (7.37 g) was used instead of 54-2 to obtain compound 63-3 (10.4 g) as pale yellow oil.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 63-3 (10.4 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 63-4 (8 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 63-4 (3 g) was used instead of 7-4 to obtain compound 63-5 (710 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 63-5 (0.7 g) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 63-6 (0.72 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 63-6 (0.3 g) was used instead of 1-2 to obtain compound 63-7 (198 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 38-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 38, compound 63-7 (57.2 mg) was used instead of 38-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 63 (28.8 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, a cyclic carbonate analogue (0.11 g) derived from compound 63-6 and 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one with DMF were used instead of 1-2 and 6-amino-1-bis(tert-butoxycarbonyl)aminoisoquinoline to obtain compound 64-1 (43.2 mg) as a pale pink amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 64-1 (28.2 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 64 (15.7 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, a cyclic carbonate analogue (0.2 g) derived from compound 52-4 and 4-amino-3-methylbenzonitrile (79.3 mg) were used instead of 1-2 and 6-amino-1-bis(tert-butoxy carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline, under high concentration condition (1M), to obtain compound 65-1 (129 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, compound 65-1 (60 mg) was used instead of 7-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 65 (8.3 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, a cyclic carbonate analogue (0.2 g) derived from compound 52-4 and 4-amino-3-chlorobenzonitrile (91.6 mg) were used instead of 1-2 and 6-amino-1-bis(tert-butoxy carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline, under high concentration condition (1M), to obtain compound 66-1 (93.1 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a suspension of compound 66-1 (60 mg) in EtOH (2 mL), was added 50% NH2OH aq. (22.4 microL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. Then the mixture was concentrated in vacuo to obtain compound 66-2 (67 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 66-2 (19 mg) in EtOH (3 mL), were added cat. Raney-Ni and AcOH (0.1 mL). The mixture was stirred under hydrogen atmosphere for 3 hours at room temperature. The mixture was filtered with Celite® pad to remove catalyst. The filtrate was concentrated with toluene in vacuo. The residue was dried by vacuum pump to obtain EXAMPLE 66 (15 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, a cyclic carbonate analogue (0.2 g) derived from compound 52-4 and 4-amino-3-fluorobenzonitrile (81.7 mg) were used instead of 1-2 and 6-amino-1-bis(tert-butoxy carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline, under high concentration condition (1M), to obtain compound 67-1 (130 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 66-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 66, compound 67-1 (67.1 mg) was used instead of 66-1 to obtain compound 67-2 (71.9 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 66-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 66, compound 67-2 (62 mg) was used instead of 66-2 to obtain EXAMPLE 67 (46.7 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
A 100-L glass jacketed reactor was charged with 4-methoxybenzaldehyde (3440 g, 25.3 mol, Aldrich lot #05826 MH and 20098PJ) and absolute ethanol (34.4 L). 2-Aminoethanol (1840 mL, 30.0 mol, Aldrich lot #06201PE) was added over 30 minutes while maintaining the temperature of the batch between 20 and 30° C. After the addition was complete, the batch was held at 20-25° C. for 2 hours until formation of the imine intermediate was deemed complete by 1H NMR analysis (DMSO-d6, aldehyde peak at 9.8 ppm not observed). The batch was cooled to 0-5° C. and sodium borohydride (1050 g, 27.8 mol, Aldrich lot #10106TC) was added portionwise over 2.8 hours while maintaining the temperature of the batch between 0 and 10° C. Once the addition was complete, the batch was allowed to gradually warm to 20-25° C. (20° C./hour) and was held at this temperature for 16 hours until the reduction of the imine intermediate was deemed complete by HPLC analysis [<1.0% (AUC) of imine by HPLC]. The reaction mixture was quenched by carefully adding 1 M aqueous sodium hydroxide (25.0 L) to the batch. This process led to the formation of insoluble masses of solid. These solids were dissolved by adding DI water (25.0 L) and the quenched was resumed. The batch was extracted with dichloromethane (CH2Cl2, 3×17.2 L). The combined organic extracts were concentrated on a rotary evaporator at 40-45° C. until distillation ceased and then the concentrate was slurried in DI water (17.2 L). The batch was cooled to 10-15° C. and the pH was adjusted to 1-2 using concentrated hydrochloric acid (2.2 L). The batch was washed with tert-butyl methyl ether (MTBE, 3×10.3 L), cooled to 10-15° C. and the pH was adjusted to 13-14 using 6 M aqueous sodium hydroxide (6.0 L). The batch was extracted with CH2Cl2 (2×10.3 L). The combined organic extracts were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and the filter cake was washed with CH2Cl2 (6.0 L). The filtrate was concentrated on a rotary evaporator at 30-35° C. until distillation ceased to afford compound 68-1 (4325 g, 94%).
A 100-L glass jacketed reactor was charged with compound 68-1 (4325 g, 23.9 mol) and 1,2-dichloroethane (86.5 L). Thionyl chloride (1900 mL, 26.1 mol, Aldrich lot #05497DJ) was added over 50 minutes while maintaining the temperature of the batch between 20 and 30° C. Once the addition was complete, the batch was heated to 55-60° C. and held at this temperature for 5.5 hours until the reaction was deemed complete by 1H NMR analysis (DMSO-d6, doublets at 7.3 ppm and 6.9 ppm shifted to 7.5 ppm and 7.0 ppm respectively, and doublets at 9.2 min and multiplet at 4.4 ppm disappeared). The batch was cooled to 20-25° C. and concentrated using a rotavap at 40-45° C. until distillation ceased. The concentrate was swapped once with MTBE (22.0 L), slurried in MTBE (21.7 L) and filtered to afford 68-2.HCl (5420 g, 96%) as white solids after drying in a vacuum oven at 20-30° C. for 17 hours.
A 50-L glass jacketed reactor was charged with compound 68-2.HCl (1940 g, 8.2 mol), DI water (19.4 L) and MTBE (19.4 L). The pH of the aqueous layer was adjusted to 11-12 using 1 M aqueous sodium hydroxide (10.5 L) and maintaining the temperature of the batch between 15 and 30° C. The phases were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with MTBE (2×9.7 L). The combined organic extracts were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, washed with MTBE (8.0 L) and the filtrate was concentrated on a rotary evaporator at 20-25° C. until distillation ceased, affording free amine 68-2 (1720 g, containing 6.8 wt % of MTBE by 1H NMR (DMSO-d6), corrected weight: 1604 g, 98%)
A 50-L glass jacketed reactor was charged with di-O-acetyl-L-tartaric anhydride (1775 g, 8.2 mol, Alfa Aesar lot # E13U033) and tetrahydrofuran (17.5 L, THF). The batch was cooled to 0-5° C. and a solution of compound 68-2 (1720 g) in THF (2.0 L) was added over 1.3 hours while maintaining the temperature of the batch between 0 and 10° C. The batch was held at 0-5° C. for 18 hours until the reaction was deemed complete by HPLC analysis [2.8% (AUC) of compound 68-2 remaining] and then it was concentrated on a rotary evaporator at 20-25° C. until distillation ceased to afford compound 68-3 [4485 g, containing 22.7 wt % of THF by 1H NMR (DMSO-d6), corrected weight: 3467 g, 102%, 86.9% (AUC) by HPLC].
A 50-L glass jacketed reactor was charged with compound 68-3 (3520 g, assuming theoretical yield for step 3, 8.5 mol) and THF (35.0 L), and the batch was heated to 50-60° C. Two portions of O-tert-butyl-N,N-diisopropylurea (2115 g, 10.6 mol, and 1700 g, 8.9 mol) were each added dropwise over 30 minutes while maintaining the temperature of the batch between 50 and 60° C. In-process assay by HPLC analysis after these additions were complete indicated that 19.5% (AUC) of compound 68-3 remained and that 70.9% (AUC) of compound 68-4 had formed. Additional O-tert-butyl-N,N-diisopropylurea (2×425 g, 4.2 mol) was added to the batch until the reaction was deemed complete by HPLC analysis [4.4% (AUC) of compound 68-3 remaining]. The batch was cooled to 15-25° C. and MTBE (19.4 L) was added. The batch was filtered over Celite® and washed with MTBE (15.0 L). The combined filtrate and washes were concentrated on a rotary evaporator at 40-45° C. until distillation ceased to afford crude compound 68-4 [4675 g, containing 10.6 wt % of THF by 1H NMR (DMSO-d6), corrected weight 4180 g, 105%, 55.7% (AUC) by HPLC]. This material was purified by silica-gel column chromatography (Four 1.1 to 1.3-kg batches using 5.5 kg of silica gel each, 20 to 60% EtOAc in heptane) to afford compound 68-4 [1915 g, 48%, 96.7-97.1% (AUC) by HPLC] as well as mixed fractions that were combined with other lots for further purification.
A 50-L glass jacketed reactor was charged with compound 68-4 (1100 g, 2.3 mol) and methanol (10.2 L), and the batch was cooled to −10 to 0° C. A slurry of potassium cyanide (80 g, 1.2 mol, Aldrich lot #14614KA) in methanol (800 mL) was added over 5 minutes while maintaining the temperature of the batch between −10 and 0° C. The batch was held at −10 to 0° C. for 3.3 hours until the reaction was deemed complete by HPLC analysis [5.3% (AUC) of compound 68-4 remaining]. Solid sodium bicarbonate (200 g, 2.4 mol, Natrium Products lot #01096A) was added and the batch was concentrated on a rotary evaporator at 20-25° C. until distillation ceased. MTBE (11.0 L) and DI water (11.0 L) were added to the concentrate, and the layers were separated. The organic layer was washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (6.0 L), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, washed with MTBE (7.0 L) and concentrated on a rotary evaporator at 20-25° C. until distillation ceased to yield compound 68-5 [910 g, containing 10.2 wt % of MTBE by 1H NMR (CDCl3), corrected weight 817 g, 90%, 82.4% (AUC) by HPLC]. This material was stored in the freezer.
A 50-L glass jacketed reactor was charged with compound 68-5 (817 g, 2.1 mol), CH2Cl2 (8.2 L) and deionized water (1.9 L). Benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide (1912 mL, 40 wt % in methanol, 4.2 mol, Aldrich lot #10896HJ) was added to the batch over 10 minutes while maintaining the temperature between 20 and 25° C. The batch was held at 20-25° C. for 1.5 hours until the reaction was deemed complete by HPLC analysis [<1.0% (AUC) of compound 68-5 remaining]. At completion of the reaction, DI water (6.5 L) was added and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2Cl2 (8.2 L). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine (8.2 L), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and washed with CH2Cl2 (2.5 L). The combined filtrate and washes were concentrated on a rotary evaporator at 30-35° C. until distillation ceased to afford crude compound 68-6 [625 g, 84%, 82.5% (AUC) by HPLC]. This material was purified by silica-gel column chromatography [5 kg of silica gel, 20 to 60% EtOAc in heptane] and the pure fractions were slurried in 1:4 MTBE/heptane to yield compound 68-6 [Two lots: 155 g, 21%, >99% (AUC) by HPLC, and 335 g, 45%, >99% (AUC) by HPLC] as white solids.
A 50-L glass jacketed reactor was charged with compound 68-6 (490 g, 1.4 mol), acetonitrile (10.1 L) and DI water (2.0 L). The batch was cooled to 0-5° C. and a slurry of cerium (IV) ammonium nitrate (3060 g, 5.6 mol, Alfa Aesar lot # H22T016) in acetonitrile (8.0 L) was added while maintaining the temperature of the batch between 0 and 5° C. The batch was held at 0-5° C. for 30 minutes, warmed to 20-25° C. and held at this temperature for 3.5 hours until the reaction was deemed complete by HPLC analysis. Saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (17.0 L) was added until the pH of the reaction mixture reached 4.5 to 5. The resulting suspension was filtered over Celite® and the filter cake was washed with CH2Cl2 (2×10.0 L) followed by 5% methanol in CH2Cl2 (10.0 L). The combined filtrate and washes were transferred to a 50-L, glass jacketed reactor and the phases were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2Cl2 (15.0 L). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and the filter cake was washed with CH2Cl2 (10.0 L). The combined filtrate and washes were concentrated on a rotary evaporator at 30-35° C. until distillation ceased to give crude compound 68-7 [700 g, >100%]. This material was purified by silica-gel column chromatography [4 kg of silica gel, 1 to 5% methanol in dichloromethane]. The pure fractions were slurried in 1:4 CH2Cl2/MTBE to yield compound 68-7 [Two lots: 189 g, 59%] as white to off-white solids.
To a 50 mL round bottom flask was added 5-iodo-3-oxo-isoindolin (1.00 g, 3.86 mmol) in DMF (10.0 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 0-5° C. NaH (60% in oil, 186 mg, 4.65 mmol) was added, and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. After 20 min, the reaction obtained a green color, and a solution of n-propyl bromide (706 mg, 5.78 mmol) in DMF (2.00 mL) was added dropwise over a period of 15 min. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature, then diluted with EtOAc (100 mL), washed with saturated aqueous NH4Cl (2×25 mL), saturated aqueous LiCl (25 mL), brine (25 mL), dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by CombiFlash (80 g, Hex/EtOAc, 100:0 to 30:70 over 30 min) to provide compound 68-8 (700 mg, 60%) as a white solid.1
A mixture of compound 68-7 (100 mg, 0.432 mmol), aryl iodide compound 68-8 (156 mg, 0.518 mmol), CuI (8.1 mg, 43 μmol), K3PO4 (183 mg, 0.861 mmol), DMSO (1.5 mL), and trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (13.6 μL, 86.1 μmol) were stirred at room temperature under nitrogen in the dark. After 14 h, additional CuI (8.1 mg, 43 μmol) and trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (13.6 μL, 86.1 μmol) were added and the mixture was stirred for an additional 2.5 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc (100 mL), washed with water (3×25 mL), brine (25 mL), dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified on CombiFlash (12 g SiO2, Hex/EtOAc, 100:0 to 0:100 over 45 min) to provide pure product compound 68-9 (120 mg, 69%) as a yellow solid.
To a 50 mL round bottom flask was added compound 68-9 (114 mg, 0.281 mmol), DMAP (3.4 mg, 28 μmol), pyridine (45 μL, 0.56 mmol) and CH2Cl2 (5.00 mL). The reaction mixture was cooled to 0-5° C., Ac2O (53 μL, 0.56 mmol) was added, stirred at 0-5° C. for 2 h, and then diluted with EtOAc (40 mL), washed with saturated aqueous CuSO4 (2×25 mL), brine (25 mL), dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide crude compound 68-10 (125 mg, quant) as a yellow solid. The product was used in the next reaction without any further purification.
In a 50 mL round bottom flask containing compound 68-10 (125 mg, 0.281 mmol) was added CH2Cl2 (1.00 mL) and TFA (2.00 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h, then TFA and CH2Cl2 were removed under reduced pressure. The crude product was triturated with ether to provide pure 68-11 (110 mg, quant.) as a yellow solid.
To a 100 mL round bottom flask was added compound 68-11 (110 mg, 0.281 mmol), DMAP (3.4 mg, 28 μmol), and 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one 1 (53.1 mg, 0.299 mmol) in CH3CN (3.00 mL). The reaction mixture was cooled to 0-5° C., then EDCI.HCl (57.5 mg, 0.299 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature. After 30 min DMF (1.00 mL) was added to dissolve the precipitate and stirring was continued for an additional 3 h. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure and the residue was triturated with ether (20.0 mL) then decanted. The undissolved material was washed with water (2×5 mL) and acetonitrile (2×5 mL) then dried on under vacuum to provide pure product 68-12 (95 mg, 62%) as off-white solid.
To a 50 mL round bottom flask was added compound 68-12 (95 mg, 0.17 mmol), CH3OH (2.00 mL) and 7 N NH3 in CH3OH (6.00 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h then the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure. Additional CH3OH (2×50 mL) was used to strip off excess NH3. The crude product was redissolved in CH3OH (50 mL) and the solvent degassed with N2 to remove trace ammonia then concentrated under reduced pressure to provide compound 68-13 (85 mg, 99%) as off-white solid.
To a 250 mL round bottom flask was added compound 68-13 (84 mg, 0.17 mmol) in CH3OH (6.00 mL) and 1 M HCl (6.00 mL). The solvent was degassed for 10 min with N2, then 10% Pd/C (84 mg, 39 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was hydrogenated at 1 atm overnight. The mixture was diluted with hot CH3OH (250 mL), filtered and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was triturated with CH3OH (5.00 mL) and filtered to provide pure product compound 68 (51 mg, 64%) as off-white solid.
A mixture of 2-(hydroxymethyl)isoindoline-1,3-dione (50.0 g, 202 mmol), 3-iodobenzoic acid (35.7 g, 202 mmol) and H2SO4 was heated at 80° C. for 3.5 h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and then poured into ice. The precipitate was filtered off, washed with H2O (1.0 L), dilute NH4OH (500 mL) and recrystallized from EtOH (300 mL) to provide compound 69-1 (25.2 g, 48%) as an off-white solid.
A mixture of compound 69-1 (3.00 g, 11.6 mmol), Cs2CO3 (15.1 g, 46.3 mmol), 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl trifluoromethanesulfonate (2.50 mL, 17.4 mmol) and CH3CN (120 mL) was heated at 80-90° C. for 1.5 h. Additional Cs2CO3 (7.52 g, 23.1 mmol) and 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl trifluoromethanesulfonate (1.0 mL, 6.93 mmol) were added and the mixture was heated for an additional 0.5 h. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature, diluted with EtOAc (250 mL), washed with saturated aqueous NH4Cl (2×20 mL), brine (3×20 mL), dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by CombiFlash (120 g, Hex/EtOAc, 100:0 to 85:15 over 35 min) to provide compound 69-2 (1.78 g, 45%) as a brown solid.
A mixture of compound 68-7 (215 mg, 0.929 mmol), aryl iodide 69-2 (348 mg, 1.02 mmol), CuI (8.8 mg, 46 μmol), K3PO4 (394 mg, 1.86 mmol), DMSO (3.1 mL), and trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (15 μL, 92 μmol) were stirred at room temperature under nitrogen in the dark for 4 h. Additional CuI (8.8 mg, 46 μmol) and trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (15 μL, 92 μmol) were added three times over the course of 20 h. After stirring for total 24 h the mixture was diluted with EtOAc (150 mL), washed with water (3×20 mL), dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified on CombiFlash (40 g, Hex/EtOAc, 100:0 to 50:50 over 35 min) to provide pure product compound 69-3 (185 mg, 45%) as a yellow solid.
To a solution of compound 69-3 (180 mg, 0.405 mmol), DMAP (4.9 mg, 40 μmol) and CH2Cl2 (4.00 mL) were added pyridine (66 μL, 0.81 mmol) and Ac2O (77 μL, 0.81 mmol) at 0-5° C. The resulting mixture was stirred for 2.5 h at 0-5° C., and then diluted with EtOAc (200 mL), washed with saturated aqueous CuSO4 (2×10 mL), H2O (10 mL), brine (10 mL), dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide crude compound 69-4 (197 mg, quant.) as a yellow solid. The product was used in the next reaction without further purification.
In a 50 mL round bottom flask containing compound 69-4 (192 mg, 0.394 mmol) was added CH2Cl2 (1.00 mL) and TFA (4.00 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 min, then TFA and CH2Cl2 were removed under reduced pressure. The crude product was triturated with ether and filtered to provide pure compound 69-5 (174 mg, quant.) as a yellow solid.
A solution of compound 69-6 (165 mg, 0.383 mmol), DMAP (4.6 mg, 38 mmol), 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one (74.6 mg, 0.421 mmol), EDCI.HCl (80.7 mg, 0.421 mmol) and CH3CN (3 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 2.5 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue purified by semi-preparative HPLC to provide pure product compound 69-6 (51 mg, 23%) as an off-white solid.
To a 50 mL round bottom flask was added compound 69-6 (51 mg, 86 mmol), and 7 N NH3 in CH3OH (5.00 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h then the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure. Residual ammonia was removed by evaporating with CH3OH (2×15 mL) and CH2Cl2 (2×15 mL) to provide compound 69-7 (47 mg, quant.) as an off-white solid.
To a 100 mL round bottom flask was added compound 69-7 (45 mg, 82 μmol) in CH3OH (4.00 mL) and 1 M HCl (4.00 mL). The solvent was degassed for 10 min with N2, then 10% Pd/C (45 mg, 21 μmol) was added and the reaction mixture was hydrogenated at 1 atm for 7 h. The mixture was filtered, washed with hot CH3OH (200 mL), and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by semi-preparative HPLC. The isolated product was dissolved in MeOH (5 mL) and then added 1 N HCl in Et2O (5 mL) and stirred for 5 min. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure to provide pure product EXAMPLE 69 (22 mg, 50%) as an off-white solid.
To a mixture of 2,3-dihydro-6-iodo-1H-isoindol-1-one (1.0 g) in DMF (20 mL) at 0° C. was added NaH (97 mg) in a single portion. The resulting mixture was stirred for 30 min at 0° C. whereupon MeI (0.25 mL) was added dropwise. The mixture was allowed to warm to rt and was stirred for 72 h. The mixture was quenched by addition of sat. aq. NH4Cl (˜3 mL) and was diluted with EtOAc (10 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layers were combined and washed sequentially with water and brine. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (ISCO, 120 g) using a gradient of 100% hexanes to 80:20 hexanes/EtOAc to afford compound 70-1 (0.84 g) as a yellow solid. LC-MS: M+H=274.
To a round bottom flask charged with a stir bar was added morpholinone compound 68-7 (0.28 g) and compound 70-1 (0.40 g) in DMSO (8 mL) at rt was added K3PO4 (0.51 g), and CuI (23 mg) under N2. trans-N,N′-Dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (37 μL) was added dropwise and the mixture was affixed with a condenser. The mixture was degassed under vacuum (˜20 mm), filled with N2, and heated to 80° C. The mixture stirred for 2.5 h at 80° C., cooled to rt, and was diluted with EtOAc. The mixture was then sequentially washed with conc NH4OH, water, and brine. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford a yellow oil. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a gradient of 100% CH2Cl2 to 60% CH2Cl2/40% MeOH to afford compound 70-2 (0.23 g) of a yellow solid. LC-MS: M+H=377.
To a solution of compound 70-2 (80 mg) in CH2Cl2 (2 ml) at 0° C. was added pyridine (26 μL), Ac2O (30 μl), and DMAP (4 mg). The mixture was stirred for 1 hour at 0° C., warmed to rt, and stirred for an additional 12 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and the organic layer was washed sequentially with sat. aq. CuSO4 solution, water, and brine. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford compound 70-3 (85 mg) as a light yellow semisolid. LC-MS: M+H=419. This material was used without further purification.
To a solution of compound 70-3 (85 mg) in CH2Cl2 (2.5 mL) at 0° C. was added TFA (0.5 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0° C. and at rt for 30 min whereupon an additional portion of TFA (0.5 mL) was added. After an additional 1 h at rt, the mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The crude mixture was redissolved in CH2Cl2 and concentrated and this protocol was repeated 5 times with to afford compound 70-4 (65 mg) as a light semisolid. LC-MS: M+H=363. This material was used without further purification.
To a solution of compound 70-4 (40 mg) in CH3CN (1 mL) at 0° C. was added 4-(5-oxo-4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4]oxadiazol-3-yl)-phenyl amide (21 mg) followed by EDCI (25 mg). The reaction mixture was warmed to rt and stirred for 72 h. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and placed under high vacuum. The crude material was purified by reverse phase HPLC using a C18 column and a gradient of (89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H) to afford compound 70-5 (30 mg) as a white solid. LC-MS: M+H=522.
To a solution of the compound 70-5 (30 mg) in MeOH (2 mL) at 0° C. was added 7M NH3/MeOH (0.3 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0° C. and an additional hour at rt. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and placed under high vacuum to afford compound 70-6 (27 mg) as a clear glass. LC-MS: M+H=480 (free base).
To a solution of the compound 70-6 (27 mg) in MeOH (2 mL) was added 1N HCl (2 mL) followed by 10% Pd/C (50 mg). The mixture was stirred under a H2 balloon for 3 h and was filtered through a pad of Celite®. The Celite® pad was washed with MeOH and the resultant filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude residue was treated with MeOH followed by dilution with Et2O and the resultant solid was collected by filtration and dried under vacuum to afford 17 mg of Example 70 as a maize solid. LC-MS: M+H=438 (free base).
According to the Step 70-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, compound 70-4 (50 mg) was treated with tert-butyl 4-aminobenzylcarbamate (37 mg) to afford compound 71-1 (58 mg) as white solid after preparative LC purification.
According to the Step 70-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, compound 71-1 (50 mg) was used instead of compound 70-5 to obtain compound 71-2 (50 mg) as a white solid. Crude compound 71-2 was used without further purification in the next step.
To round bottom flask charged with the compound 71-2 (50 mg) at rt was added 4 N HCl/dioxane (3 mL). The resulting solution was stirred for 3 h, concentrated under reduced pressure, and placed under high vacuum. The crude product was dissolved in MeOH and Et2O and the resultant solid was collected and dried to afford EXAMPLE 71 (36 mg) as an off-white solid. LC-MS: M+H=425 (free base).
According to the Step 70-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, compound 70-4 (50 mg) was treated with tert-butyl 6-amino-3,4-dihydroisoquinoline-2(1H)-carboxylate (30 mg) to afford compound 72-1 (52 mg) as a light yellow solid after preparative LC purification.
According to the Step 70-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, compound 72-1 (50 mg) was used instead of compound 70-5 to obtain compound 72-2 (39 mg) as an off-white solid. Crude compound 72-2 was used without further purification in the next step.
According to the Step 71-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 71, 72-2 (39 mg) was used instead of compound 71-2 to obtain EXAMPLE 72 (26 mg) as a maize solid.
According to the Step 70-2 in the synthetic method for Example 70, 3,5-(bistrifluoromethyl)iodobenzene (0.11 mL) was used instead of compound 70-1 to obtain compound 73-1 (0.13 g) as a white solid after reverse-phase (C18) purification.
According to the Step 70-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, 73-1 (0.13 g) was used instead of compound 70-2 to obtain compound 73-2 (0.14 g) as a yellow semisolid that was used without further purification.
According to the Step 70-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, compound 73-2 (0.14 g) was used instead of compound 70-3 to afford compound 73-3 (0.12 g) as a light yellow solid that was used without further purification.
According to the Step 70-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, compound 73-3 (65 mg) was used instead of compound 70-4 to obtain compound 73-4 (69 mg) as a white solid after reverse-phase (C18) HPLC purification.
According to the Step 70-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, compound 73-4 (69 mg) was used instead of compound 70-5 to obtain compound 73-5 (58 mg) as a white solid that was used without further purification.
According to the Step 70-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, compound 73-5 (53 mg) was used instead of compound 70-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 73 (37 mg) as a maize solid.
According to the Step 70-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, compound 73-3 (65 mg) was used instead of compound 70-4 to couple to 5-aminoisoindolin-1-one (25 mg) to obtain compound 74-1 (69 mg) as a white solid after reverse-phase (C18) purification.
According to the Step 70-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, compound 74-1 (50 mg) was used instead of compound 70-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 74 (48 mg) as white solid.
To a solution of compound 68-6 (0.10 g, 0.28 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) at 0° C. was added TFA (0.6 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0° C., warmed to rt, and stirred for an additional 3 h. The mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The crude mixture was redissolved in CH2Cl2 and concentrated and this protocol was repeated 5 times with to afford compound 75-1 (78 mg) as a light yellow oil that was used without further purification.
To a solution of compound 75-1 (0.11 g) in THF (2.5 mL) at 0° C. was added activated charcoal (15 mg) followed by triphosgene (0.44 g). The mixture was allowed to warm to rt, stirred for 12 h, and was filtered through a pad of Celite®. The Celite® pad was washed with THF and the resultant filtrated was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was dissolved in DMF (2 mL), 4-aminobenzonitrile (65 mg) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 12 h at rt. The crude mixture was purified directly by reverse phase HPLC using a C18 column and a gradient of (89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H) to afford compound 75-2 (28%) as a white solid.
To a pressure tube charged with compound 75-2 (35 mg) in MeOH (1.2 mL) at 0° C. was added AcCl (1.2 ml) dropwise. The tube was capped, warmed to rt, and stirred for 12 h. The mixture was concentrated to dryness and the pressure tube was charged with the crude mixture in 7M NH3/MeOH (4 mL). The mixture was stirred for 3 days and was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude mixture was purified by reverse phase HPLC using a C18 column and a gradient of (89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H) to afford EXAMPLE 75 (20 mg) as a white solid as the hydrochloride salt after HCl treatment.
According to the Step 75-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 75, compound 75-1 (0.28 g) was treated with di-tert-butyl(6-aminoisoquinolin-1-yl)imidocarbonate (0.51 g) from WO 2006/062972 to obtain compound 76-1 (0.23 g) as a white solid after reverse-phase purification.
To a solution of compound 76-1 (0.23 g) in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) at 0° C. was added TFA (0.6 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0° C., warmed to rt, and stirred for an additional 12 h. The mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 and concentrated to dryness and this protocol was repeated 5 times. The crude mixture was purified by reverse phase HPLC using a C18 column and a gradient of (89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H) to afford EXAMPLE 76 (0.10 g) as a white solid as the hydrochloride salt upon HCl treatment.
To a solution of 3-iodobenzoic acid 1 (482 mg, 1.94 mmol) in DMF (6 mL) was added 4,4-difluoropiperidine 2 (259 mg, 2.14 mmol), HATU (886 mg, 2.33 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (750 mg, 5.81 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 hours. Ethyl acetate (100 mL) was added and the organic layer was washed with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution, 1 N hydrochloric acid, water and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired 4,4-difluoro-1-[(3-iodophenyl)carbonyl]piperidine compound 77-1 (362 mg, 1.03 mmol).
To a solution of compound 68-7 (200 mg, 0.87 mmol) in anhydrous DMSO (8 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added compound 77-1 (362 mg, 1.03 mmol), potassium phosphate (367 mg, 1.73 mmol), copper (I) iodide (16 mg, 0.084 mmol) and trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (24 mg, 0.17 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 80° C. for 2 hours. Ethyl acetate (100 mL) was added and the organic layer was washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired compound 77-2 (251 mg, 0.63 mmol).
To compound 77-2 (251 mg, 0.63 mmol) was added a 50% solution of trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane (6 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure to afford the desired compound 77-3 (0.63 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
To a solution of compound 77-3 (0.63 mmol) in acetonitrile (8 mL) was added 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one 1 (166 mg, 0.94 mmol), EDCI (156 mg, 0.81 mmol) and DMAP (8 mg, 0.066 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired compound 77-4 (226 mg, 0.41 mmol).
To a solution of compound 77-4 (226 mg, 0.41 mmol) in a 50% solution of 1 N hydrochloric acid in methanol (12 mL) was added palladium-charcoal (10%, 230 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under a hydrogen atmosphere for 16 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered. The filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE 77 (204 mg, 0.37 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
To a solution of 4-iodobenzenesulfonyl chloride 1 (500 mg, 1.66 mmol) in anhydrous acetonitrile (8 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added pyrrolidine 2 (140 mg, 1.97 mmol) and pyridine (261 mg, 3.3 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. Ethyl acetate (100 mL) was added and the organic layer was washed with 1 N hydrochloric acid, water and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired 1-[(4-iodobenzene)sulfonyl]pyrrolidine compound 78-1 (487 mg, 1.45 mmol).
To a solution of compound 68-7 (200 mg, 0.87 mmol) in anhydrous DMSO (8 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added compound 78-1 (321 mg, 0.95 mmol), potassium phosphate (367 mg, 1.73 mmol), copper (I) iodide (16 mg, 0.084 mmol) and trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (24 mg, 0.17 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 80° C. for 3 hours. Ethyl acetate (100 mL) was added and the organic layer was washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired compound 78-2 (335 mg, 0.76 mmol).
To a solution of compound 78-2 (335 mg, 0.76 mmol) in anhydrous dichloromethane (8 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added acetic anhydride (154 mg, 1.51 mmol) and triethylamine (231 mg, 2.29 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. DMAP (9.3 mg, 0.076 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. Ethyl acetate (100 mL) was added and the organic layer was washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired compound 78-3 (355 mg, 0.74 mmol).
To compound 78-3 (355 mg, 0.74 mmol) was added a 50% solution of trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane (6 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 hours. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure to afford the desired compound 78-4 (0.74 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
To a solution of compound 78-4 (0.74 mmol) in acetonitrile (8 mL) was added 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one 1 (191 mg, 1.08 mmol), EDCI (179 mg, 0.93 mmol) and DMAP (9 mg, 0.073 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired compound 78-5 (245 mg, 0.42 mmol).
To compound 78-5 (245 mg, 0.42 mmol) was added a solution of 7 N ammonia in methanol (8 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 40 minutes. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure to afford the desired compound 78-6 (0.42 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
To a solution of compound 78-6 (0.42 mmol) in a 50% solution of 1 N hydrochloric acid in methanol (12 mL) was added palladium-charcoal (10%, 245 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under a hydrogen atmosphere for 16 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered. The filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE 78 (173 mg, 0.35 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
To a solution of 68-7 (200 mg, 0.87 mmol) in anhydrous acetonitrile (4 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added 4-(methylsulfonyl)phenylboronic acid 1 (346 mg, 1.73 mmol), copper (II) acetate (158 mg, 0.89 mmol), trimethylamine N-oxide (65 mg, 0.87 mmol) and triethylamine (175 mg, 1.73 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. Ethyl acetate (100 mL) was added and the organic layer was washed with ammonium hydroxide, water and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired compound 79-1 (156 mg, 0.41 mmol).
To compound 79-1 (156 mg, 0.41 mmol) was added a 4 N solution of hydrogen chloride in dioxane (8 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure to afford the desired compound 79-2 (0.41 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
To a solution of compound 79-2 (0.41 mmol) in acetonitrile (4 mL) was added 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one 2 (191 mg, 1.08 mmol) and EDCI (98 mg, 0.51 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hour. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired compound 79-3 (28 mg, 0.057 mmol).
To a solution of compound 79-3 (28 mg, 0.057 mmol) in a 50% solution of 1 N hydrochloric acid in methanol (4 mL) was added palladium-charcoal (10%, 28 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under a hydrogen atmosphere for 16 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered. The filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE 79 (5 mg, 0.011 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 79-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 79, compound 80-1 (47 mg, 0.12 mmol) was used instead of compound 79-1 to obtain compound 80-2 (0.12 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 79-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 79, compound 80-2 (0.12 mmol) was used instead of compound 79-2 to obtain compound 80-3 (17 mg, 0.035 mmol).
According to Step 79-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 79, compound 80-3 (17 mg, 0.035 mmol) was used instead of compound 79-3 to obtain EXAMPLE 80 (13 mg, 0.029 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, 4-iodobenzoic acid 1 and pyrrolidine 2 were used to obtain compound 81-1.
According to Step 77-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 81-1 (187 mg, 0.62 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-1 to obtain compound 81-2 (153 mg, 0.38 mmol).
According to Step 77-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 81-2 (153 mg, 0.38 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-2 to obtain compound 81-3 (0.38 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 77-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 81-3 (0.38 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-3 to obtain compound 81-4 (79 mg, 0.16 mmol).
According to Step 77-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 81-4 (79 mg, 0.16 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-4 to obtain compound EXAMPLE 81 (72 mg, 0.15 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, 4-iodobenzoic acid 1 and morpholine 2 were used to obtain compound 82-1.
According to Step 77-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 82-1 (218 mg, 0.69 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-1 to obtain compound 82-2 (221 mg, 0.53 mmol).
According to Step 77-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 82-2 (221 mg, 0.53 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-2 to obtain compound 82-3 (141 mg, 0.39 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 77-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 82-3 (40 mg, 0.11 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-3 to obtain compound 82-4 (42 mg, 0.08 mmol).
According to Step 77-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 82-4 (42 mg, 0.08 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-4 to obtain EXAMPLE 82 (23 mg, 0.05 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77-1, 4-iodobenzoic acid 1 and 4,4-difluoropiperidine 2 were used to obtain compound 83-1.
According to Step 77-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 83-1 (593 mg, 1.69 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-1 to obtain compound 83-2 (256 mg, 0.56 mmol).
According to Step 77-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 83-2 (256 mg, 0.56 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-2 to obtain compound 83-3 (0.56 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 77-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 83-3 (0.56 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-3 to obtain compound 83-4 (186 mg, 0.33 mmol).
According to Step 77-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 83-4 (186 mg, 0.33 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-4 to obtain EXAMPLE 83 (91 mg, 0.18 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77-1, 3-iodobenzoic acid 1 and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline 2 were used to obtain compound 84-1.
According to Step 77-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 84-1 (518 mg, 1.43 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-1 to obtain compound 84-2 (300 mg, 0.64 mmol).
According to Step 77-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 84-2 (300 mg, 0.64 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-2 to obtain compound 84-3 (0.64 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 77-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 84-3 (0.64 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-3 to obtain compound 84-4 (279 mg, 0.49 mmol).
According to Step 77-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 84-4 (279 mg, 0.49 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-4 to obtain EXAMPLE 84 (190 mg, 0.36 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77-1, 3-iodobenzoic acid 1 and isoindoline 2 were used to obtain compound 85-1.
According to Step 77-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 85-1 (499 mg, 1.43 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-1 to obtain compound 85-2 (152 mg, 0.34 mmol).
According to Step 77-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 85-2 (152 mg, 0.34 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-2 to obtain compound 85-3 (0.34 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 77-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 85-3 (0.34 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-3 to obtain compound 85-4 (160 mg, 0.29 mmol).
According to Step 77-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 85-4 (160 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-4 to obtain EXAMPLE 85 (103 mg, 0.20 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77-1, 3-iodobenzoic acid 1 and morpholine 2 were used to obtain compound 85-1.
According to Step 77-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 86-1 (302 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-1 to obtain compound 86-2 (250 mg, 0.60 mmol).
According to Step 77-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 86-2 (250 mg, 0.60 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-2 to obtain compound 86-3 (0.60 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 77-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 86-3 (0.60 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-3 to obtain compound 86-4 (170 mg, 0.33 mmol).
According to Step 77-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 86-4 (170 mg, 0.33 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-4 to obtain EXAMPLE 86 (145 mg, 0.30 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77-1, 3-iodobenzoic acid 1 and pyrrolidine 2 were used to obtain compound 87-1.
According to Step 77-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 87-1 (286 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-1 to obtain compound 87-2 (218 mg, 0.54 mmol).
According to Step 77-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 87-2 (218 mg, 0.54 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-2 to obtain compound 87-3 (0.54 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 77-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 87-3 (0.54 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-3 to obtain compound 87-4 (146 mg, 0.29 mmol).
According to Step 77-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 87-4 (146 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-4 to obtain EXAMPLE 87 (133 mg, 0.29 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, 1-fluoro-4-iodobenzene 1 (67 mg, 0.30 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 88-1 (67 mg, 0.21 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 88-1 (67 mg, 0.21 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 88-2 (77 mg, 0.21 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 88-2 (77 mg, 0.21 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 88-3 (0.21 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 88-3 (0.21 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 88-4 (0.21 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 88-4 (0.21 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 88-5 (0.21 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 88-5 (0.21 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 88 (45 mg, 0.12 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, 1,3-difluoro-5-iodobenzene 1 (87 mg, 0.37 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 89-1 (98 mg, 0.29 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 89-1 (98 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 89-2 (104 mg, 0.27 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 89-2 (104 mg, 0.27 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 89-3 (0.27 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 89-3 (0.27 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 89-4 (0.27 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 89-4 (0.27 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 89-5 (0.27 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 89-5 (0.27 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 89 (38 mg, 0.094 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, 4-iodobenzenesulfonyl chloride 1 and morpholine 2 were used to obtain compound 90-1.
According to Step 77-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 90-1 (336 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-1 to obtain compound 90-2 (239 mg, 0.52 mmol).
According to Step 77-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 90-2 (239 mg, 0.52 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-2 to obtain compound 90-3 (208 mg, 0.52 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 77-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 90-3 (208 mg, 0.52 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-3 to obtain compound 90-4 (18 mg, 0.032 mmol).
According to Step 77-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 90-4 (18 mg, 0.032 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-4 to obtain EXAMPLE 90 (13 mg, 0.025 mmol).
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, 1-[(4-iodophenyl)carbonyl]-4-methanesulfonylpiperazine 1 (375 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 91-1 (264 mg, 0.53 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 91-2 (158 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 91-3 (141 mg, 0.29 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 91-3 (141 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 91-4 (151 mg, 0.24 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 91-4 (151 mg, 0.24 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 91-5 (0.24 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 91-5 (0.24 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 91 (115 mg, 0.21 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, 2-fluoro-5-iodopyridine 1 (80 mg, 0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 92-1 (94 mg, 0.29 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 92-1 (94 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 92-2 (80 mg, 0.22 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 92-2 (80 mg, 0.22 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 92-3 (0.22 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 92-3 (0.22 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 92-4 (0.22 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 92-4 (0.22 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 92-5 (0.22 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 92-5 (0.22 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 92 (67 mg, 0.17 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
(R)-tert-butyl 2-hydroxy-2-((R)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)acetate (0.5 g, 0.002162 mol) and 4-trifluoromethylphenyl iodide (0.882 g, 1.5 eq) were dissolved in 1,2-dioxane (14 ml), to this mixture were added CuI (82 mg, 0.2 eq), K2CO3 (598 mg, 2 eq), and trans-N,N-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (0.1 ml, 0.3 eq). The resulting solution was degassed and heated at 115° C. for 5 hours. The mixture was cooled to rt, the solid removed by filtration, solution washed with water, dried (MgSO4), and concentrated. The resulting residue was then purified by silica gel chromatography (0-20% EtOAc in hexane) to give 477 mg of compound 93-1.
Compound 93-1 (350 mg, 0.932 mmol) was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (4.66 ml) and cooled to 0° C., Ac2O (0.176 ml, 2 eq), pyridine (0.151 ml, 2 eq), and DMAP (11 mg, 0.1 eq) was added. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours, diluted with EtOAc, washed with CuSO4 solution, water, dried and concentrated to give 370 mg of compound 93-2.
Compound 93-2 (370 mg, 0.884 mmol) was dissolved in 1:1 CH2Cl2/TFA (8.8 ml) and stirred for 30 minutes. The mixture was concentrated to give 310 mg of compound 93-3.
Compound 93-3 (371 mg, 1.03 mmol) was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (5.13 ml), (COCl)2 (0.176 ml, 2 eq), then 1 drop of DMF was added. The mixture was stirred for 1 hour, concentrated to dryness, taken up in DMF and 4-cyano-3-fluoroaniline (0.559 g, 4 eq) added. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours, NH4Cl(sat) added, the mixture extracted with EtOAc, dried (MgSO4), concentrated, silica gel chromatography to give 260 mg of compound 93-4.
Compound 93-4 (160 mg, 0.334 mmol) was dissolved in 10:1 DMF/water (3.34 ml), K2CO3 (554 mg, 12 eq) and acetohydroxamic acid (150 mg, 6 eq) were added and the mixture heated at 55° C. for 4 hours. After cooling to room temperature the mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with water, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated. The residue was purified by C18 HPLC (89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H-9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H) to give 9 mg of EXAMPLE 93.
Compound 93-4 (20 mg, 0.042 mmol) was dissolved in n-BuOH (0.42 ml) and NH2NH2 (0.13 ml, 100 eq) was added, heated at 55° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was concentrated and purified by C18 HPLC (89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H-9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H) to give 2.6 mg EXAMPLE 94.
Compound 93-4 (30 mg, 0.063 mmol) dissolved in EtOH (7.82 ml), cooled to −78° C., HCl(g) was bubbled through for five minutes. The reaction was sealed and allowed to warm to rt with periodic venting and stirred overnight. The mixture was degassed, concentrated and taken up in 7N NH3 in MeOH and stirred overnight. The mixture was concentrated and purified by C18 HPLC (89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H-9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H) to give 9 mg of EXAMPLE 95.
To a stirred mixture of compound 93-3 (175 mg, 0.50 mmol), DMAP (12 mg, 20 mmol %), and 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one 1 (177 mg, 2 eq) in MeCN (2.5 ml) at 0° C., EDCI (191 mg, 2 eq) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at RT for 2 h. The volatile materials were removed on the rotavap. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (MeOH/DCM 0 to 10%) to give compound 96-1 (110 mg).
The compound 96-1 (110 mg) was treated with 7 M NH3/MeOH (1 mL) and the mixture was stirred at RT for 1 h. After removal of the volatile materials on the rotavap, the residue was dissolved in MeOH (1 mL) and 3M HCl (0.25 ml). The resulting suspension was treated with a balloon of H2 over 10% Pd/C (30 mg) and stirred at RT for 2 h. The resulting mixture was filtered through Celite® and concentrated. The residue was purified by reverse phase HPLC to give EXAMPLE 96 which was converted to the HCl salt (88 mg) by treating with one equivalent HCl in ether and concentration on a rotavap.
EXAMPLE 97 was synthesized similarly as for the synthesis of EXAMPLE 93 and EXAMPLE 96 using 1-iodo-3-(trifluoromethyl)benzene 1.
A mixture of 2-amino-4-nitrobenzoic acid (5.0 g, 27.5 mmol) and formamide (8.0 ml, 201.5 mmol) in a microwave reaction vessel was heated in a microwave reactor at 150° C. for 1 hr. The slurry was cooled to rt, stirred with aq. NaHCO3, filtered, washed with water followed by ether and dried in vacuum oven to provide 3.7 g of 7-nitroquinazolin-4(3H)-one (compound 98-1).
To a solution of 7-nitroquinazolin-4(3H)-one (2.0 g, 10.5 mmol) in 40 ml thionyl chloride was added 0.8 ml of DMF and the mixture was heated at reflux overnight then evaporated to dryness to provide crude 4-chloro-7-nitroquinazoline.
A mixture of 1.6 g of 4-chloro-7-nitroquinazoline in 50 ml 7N ammonia in methanol was stirred overnight at rt and concentrated to dryness. The solid was suspended in water, filtered, rinsed with water followed by ether and dried overnight in vacuum oven to provide 0.98 g of 7-nitroquinazolin-4-amine (compound 98-2).
To a suspension of 7-nitroquinazolin-4-amine (0.98 g, 5.2 mmol) in 20 ml THF at rt was added a 1M solution of di-tert-butyldicarbonate in THF (10.3 ml, 10.3 mmol, 2 eq.) followed by a 1M solution of LHMDS in THF (8.8 mmol, 1.7 eq.). The resultant clear solution was stirred for 10 min. quenched with aq. NH4Cl, extracted 3× with ethyl acetate, the combined organic layers washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by chromatography eluting with 30% ethyl acetate in hexanes to provide 713 mg of tert-butyl 7-nitroquinazolin-4-ylcarbamate (compound 98-3).
A mixture of 600 mg of tert-butyl 7-nitroquinazolin-4-ylcarbamate and 150 mg of 10% Pd—C in 15 ml each of THF and MeOH was stirred overnight under a hydrogen balloon, filtered through a Celite® pad, concentrated and purified by chromatography eluting with 5% methanol in dichloromethane to provide 385 mg of tert-butyl 7-aminoquinazolin-4-ylcarbamate (compound 98-4). MS m/e=261.1 (MH+)
Compound 98-5 was prepared using a procedure similar to the preparation of compound 93-3.
To a solution of compound 98-5 (0.30 mmol) in 4 ml of dichloromethane was added oxalylchloride (75 μA, 0.886 mmol, 3 eq.) followed by 1 drop of DMF. Stirred at rt for 1 hr, added toluene and evaporated to dryness to provide crude compound 98-6 which was used as such for the next step.
To a solution of compound 98-6 (˜0.15 mmol) in 2 ml dichloromethane at 0° C. was added tert-butyl 7-aminoquinazolin-4-ylcarbamate (compound 98-4) (77 mg, 0.30 mmol, 2 eq.) followed by pyridine (24 μA, 0.30 mmol, 2 eq.) and DMAP (2 mg, 0.016 mmol, 0.1 eq.). To the mixture was added 1 ml of acetonitrile and stirred overnight while warming to rt. It was diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with aq. NaHCO3, water and brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, concentrated to dryness. The residue was stirred overnight with 5 ml of 7N ammonia in methanol. The methanol was evaporated and the residue was stirred with 2 ml each of dichloromethane and trifluoroacetic acid for about 75 min. The mixture was evaporated to dryness and the residue was purified by RPHPLC to provide 14 mg of EXAMPLE 98.
To 150 mg of compound 93-3 in 4 ml of dry acetonitrile at 0° C. was added 74 mg of 4-amino benzonitrile, 5 mg of DMAP and 103 mg of EDCI and the mixture stirred under argon for two hours. The reaction mixture was poured onto water and extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried with MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. Purification by flash chromatography yielded 151 mg of compound 99-1.
To Compound 99-1 in 15 mL of 7M NH3 in MeOH was added excess Raney Ni (an aq. suspension) and the mixture stirred under a balloon of hydrogen for two hours. The mixture was filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding a white solid. Purification by RP-HPLC yielded 34 mg of EXAMPLE 99 as a white solid after conversion to the HCl salt by the addition of 1N HCl in diethyl ether and evaporation to dryness.
Compound 100-1 was prepared from compound 68-7 using a procedure similar to the preparation of compound 96-1. To about 30 mL of 7N NH3/MeOH was added 465 mg of compound 100-1 and the mixture was stirred in a flask sealed with a rubber stopper for 1.5 hrs. The mixture was then evaporated to dryness. To the residue in 3 mL of MeOH was added 45 mg of 10% Pd/C and 2 mL of 1N aq. HCl and the suspension stirred under a balloon of H2. After about 3 hours an additional 60 mg of Pd/C was added and after a further 1 hr, the mixture was filtered and evaporated to dryness. Purification by RP-HPLC yielded 118 mg of EXAMPLE 100 as a white solid after conversion to the di-HCl salt by the addition of 1N HCl in diethyl ether and evaporation to dryness.
Compound 101-1 was prepared from compound 68-7 using a procedure similar to the preparation of compound 96-1.
To 25 mg of compound 101-1 in 4 ml of THF and 1 ml of H2O was added 13 mg of acetamide and 1 mg of PdCl2 and the mixture stirred under argon. After 16 hrs, an additional 1 mg of PdCl2 was added and after an additional 16 hrs. the reaction mixture was filtered and evaporated to dryness. To the residue was added 3 ml of 7N NH3/MeOH and the flask sealed with a septa and stirred for 3 hrs. The resulting mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate and a mixture of DMSO/water/acetonitrile. The combined ethyl acetate phases were evaporated to dryness yielding about 8 mg of EXAMPLE 101.
According to the Step 68-9 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 68, 1-bromo-3-[2-(benzyloxyethyl)]benzene (0.3 g) was used instead of compound 68-8 to obtain compound 102-1 (234 mg) as colorless oil.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 102-1 (0.13 g) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 102-2 (0.11 g) as colorless oil.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, 102-2 (0.11 g) and 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one (47 mg) with DMF were used instead of 1-2 and 6-Amino-1-bis(tert-butoxyl carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline to obtain compound 102-3 (38 mg) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 102-3 (30 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 102 (26 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 68-9 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 68, 2-iodo-5-trifluoromethylpyridine (0.28 g) was used instead of compound 68-8 to obtain compound 103-1 (105 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 103-1 (98 mg) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 103-2 (76 mg) as colorless oil.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, 103-2 (75 mg) and 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one (41 mg) were used instead of 1-2 and 6-Amino-1-bis(tert-butoxyl carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline to obtain compound 103-3 (7 mg) as pale red amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 103-3 (6 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 103 (6 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 68-9 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 68, 1-bromo-3-[(methylsulfonyl)methyl]benzene (0.39 g) was used instead of compound 68-8 to obtain compound 104-1 (0.22 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 104-1 (0.2 g) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 104-2 (170 mg) as colorless oil.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, 104-2 (170 mg) and 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one (82 mg) with DMF were used instead of 1-2 and 6-Amino-1-bis(tert-butoxyl carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline to obtain compound 104-3 (54 mg) as a pale red amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 104-3 (30 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 104 (16 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 68-9 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 68, 1, 4-diiodobenzene (74.9 mg) was used instead of compound 68-8 to obtain compound 105-1 (23.1 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 22-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 22, compound 105-1 (0.12 g) and 2-methylsulfonylphenylboronic acid (0.11 g) were used instead of 14-4 and 2-thiopheneboronic acid to obtain compound 105-2 (102 mg) as yellow oil.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 105-2 (98 mg) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 105-2 (87.1 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, 105-3 (0.1 g) and 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one (41 mg) with DMF were used instead of 1-2 and 6-Amino-1-bis(tert-butoxyl carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline to obtain compound 105-4 (52 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 105-4 (20 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 105 (15 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 105-1 (0.12 g) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 106-1 (102 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, 106-1 (86 mg) and 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one (38 mg) with DMF were used instead of 1-2 and 6-Amino-1-bis(tert-butoxyl carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline to obtain compound 106-2 (42 mg) as a gray amorphous solid.
According to the Step 22-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 22, compound 106-2 (30 mg) and [2-[2-[[(1,1-dimethylethyl)dimethylsilyl]oxy]ethyl]phenyl]boronic acid (31.4 mg) were used instead of 14-4 and 2-thiopheneboronic acid to obtain compound 106-3 (10 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 106-3 (28 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 106 (1.2 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 68-9 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 68, 1,3-diiodobenzene (1.5 g) was used instead of compound 68-8 to obtain compound 107-1 (425 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 22-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 22, compound 107-1 (0.2 g) and 3-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylic acid 1,1-dimethylethyl ester (0.27 g) were used instead of 14-4 and 2-thiopheneboronic acid to obtain compound 107-2 (137 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 52-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 52, compound 107-2 (0.12 g) was used instead of 52-3 to obtain compound 107-3 (89 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 77-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 107-3 (35 mg) and 5-amino-1,3-dihydro-2H-benzimidazol-2-one (17.5 mg) were used instead of 3-iodobenzoic acid and 4,4-difluoropiperidine to obtain compound 107-4 (7 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 107-4 (7 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 107 (7 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, 1-(4-methylphenyl)-2-piperidinone (4 g) was used instead of 4-(4-methylphenyl)-3-morpholinone to obtain compound 108-1 (0.5 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 108-1 (0.5 g) was used instead of 1-1 (LP) to obtain compound 108-2 (0.1 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a solution of 108-2 (0.1 g), Diisopropylethylamine (0.2 mL), HOAt (77.5 mg), 2-Chloro-1,3-dimethylimidazolidinium hexafluorophosphate (158 mg), was added 6-Amino-1-bis(tert-butoxyl carbonyl)aminoisoquinoline (164 mg) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 hours. To the mixture, was added sat.NaHCO3 aq. and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water and brine, dried with anhydr.Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was purified by silica gel flash column chromatography (eluent: Hex-EtOAc=1-1˜1-2˜1-4) to obtain compound 108-3 (53.4 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 108-3 (34.8 mg) was used instead of 1-3 to obtain EXAMPLE 108 (17.8 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, 4-(4-methylphenyl)-3-oxopiperazine-1-carboxylic acid benzyl ester (2.3 g) was used instead of 4-(4-methylphenyl)-3-morpholinone to obtain compound 109-1 (2.2 g) as diastereomeric mixture.
According to the Step 33-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 33, compound 109-1 (0.3 g) with EtOH was used instead of EXAMPLE 32 to obtain compound 109-2 (0.2 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 109-2 (0.2 g) was used instead of 26-5 to obtain compound 109-3 (0.11 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 109-3 (0.11 g) and LiOH—H2O (13.8 mg) were used instead of 1-1 (LP) and NaOH to obtain compound 109-4 (90 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 108-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 108, compound 109-4 (90 mg) was used instead of 108-2 to obtain compound 109-5 (14.9 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 109-5 (14.9 mg) was used instead of 1-3 to obtain EXAMPLE 109 (12.9 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
To a solution of 109-2 (0.3 g) in EtOH (10 mL), were added 4-(4,6-dimethoxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-4-methylmorpholinium chloride (426 mg) and formic acid (0.05 mL) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. After the reaction, water was added into the reaction mixture. Then the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water, sat. NaHCO3 aq., and brine, then dried with anhydr. Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain 110-1 (0.14 g) as diastereomeric mixture. 110-1 was used in the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 1-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 110-1 (0.14 g) and LiOH—H2O (18 mg) were used instead of 1-1 (LP) and NaOH to obtain compound 110-2 (0.12 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 108-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 108, compound 110-2 (0.12 g) was used instead of 108-2 to obtain compound 110-3 (6.2 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 110-3 (6.2 mg) was used instead of 1-3 to obtain EXAMPLE 110 (3.8 mg) as a pale brawn amorphous solid.
According to the Step 110-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 110, benzoic acid (87 mg) was used instead of formic acid to obtain compound 111-1 (128 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 111-1 (128 mg) and LiOH—H2O (14.5 mg) were used instead of 1-1 (LP) and NaOH to obtain compound III-2 (100 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound III-2 (80 mg) was used instead of 1-2 to obtain compound III-3 (7 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound III-3 (7 mg) was used instead of 1-3 to obtain EXAMPLE 111 (1.7 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, 4-(4-Methylphenyl)-thiomorpholin-3-one (3 g) was used instead of 4-(4-Methylphenyl)-3-morpholinone to obtain compound 112-1 (2 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 112-1 (0.88 g) was used instead of 1-1 (LP) to obtain compound 112-2 (0.59 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 77-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 112-2 (0.55 g) and 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one (0.52 g) were used instead of 3-iodobenzoic acid and 4,4-difluoropiperidine to obtain compound 112-3 (0.52 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
To a solution of 112-3 (30 mg) in AcOH (1.5 mL), was added zinc powder (0.22 g) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 3 hours. After the reaction, the mixture was filtered through Celite® pad to remove zinc powder. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to obtain EXAMPLE 112 (4.2 mg) as a pale brawn amorphous solid.
To a solution of 112-3 (5 mg) in MeOH—H2O (1-0.5 mL), was added oxone (27.9 mg) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. Then water was added into the reaction to precipitate. The precipitate was collected by filtration and was dried to obtain 113-1 (4 mg) as a pale amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 113-1 (25 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 113 (15.8 mg) as a pale green amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-9 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, N-(3-chloropropyl)-4-methylaniline (1.85 g) was used instead of 26-1 to obtain compound 114-1 (4.46 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-10 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, 114-1 (3 g) was used instead of 26-9 to obtain compound 114-2 (1.17 g) as a pale pink amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 114-2 (0.6 g) was used instead of 7-3 to obtain compound 114-3 (0.54 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 7-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 7, 114-3 (0.2 g) was used instead of 7-4 to obtain compound 114-4 (40 mg) as a pale red amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 114-4 (20 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 114 (20 mg) as a yellow amorphous solid.
To a solution of 4-(phenylmethyl)-2-morpholinecarboxaldehyde (78 mg) in MeOH (1.4 mL), was added TMSCN (0.073 mL) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to obtain 115-1 (83 mg) as diastereomeric mixture.
To a solution of 115-1 (0.68 g) in HCl-EtOH (20 mL), was added conc. HCl (10 mL) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was refluxed for 2.5 hours. Then the mixture was concentrated in vacuo to obtain 115-2 (0.94 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 33-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 33, compound 115-2 (0.9 g) with EtOH was used instead of EXAMPLE 32 to obtain compound 115-3 (0.65 g) as pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 28-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 28, compound 115-3 (0.2 g) and 4-methylbenzoyl chloride (164 mg) were used instead of 26-5 and mesyl chloride to obtain compound 115-4 (85 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 115-4 (82.7 mg) was used instead of 1-1 (LP) to obtain compound 115-5 (87.5 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 77-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 115-5 (74 mg) and 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one (70.4 mg) were used instead of 3-iodobenzoic acid and 4,4-difluoropiperidine to obtain compound 115-6 (75.1 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 115-6 (20 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 115 (11.2 mg) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 28-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 28, compound 115-3 (0.2 g) and tosylchloride (203 mg) were used instead of 26-5 and mesyl chloride to obtain compound 116-1 (108 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 116-1 (108 mg) was used instead of 1-1 (LP) to obtain compound 116-2 (101 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 77-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 116-2 (94 mg) and 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one (79.2 mg) were used instead of 3-iodobenzoic acid and 4,4-difluoropiperidine to obtain compound 116-3 (83 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 26-B in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 26, compound 116-3 (20 mg) was used instead of 26-14 to obtain EXAMPLE 116 (16.7 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 20-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 20, compound 1-1(LP) (0.2 g) was used instead of 20-1 to obtain compound 117-1 (0.2 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 117-1 (45 mg) and LiOH—H2O (6.8 mg) were used instead of 1-1 (LP) and NaOH to obtain compound 117-2 (41 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 117-2 (30 mg) was used instead of 1-2 to obtain compound 117-3 (4 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 1-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE 1, compound 117-3 (3.1 mg) was used instead of 1-3 to obtain EXAMPLE 117 (3.7 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a round bottom flask charged with a stir bar was added morpholinone (0.15 g) (68-7) and 3-trifluoromethoxyiodobenzene (0.12 mL) in dioxane (4 mL) at rt was added Cs2CO3 (0.42 g), and CuI (37 mg) under N2. trans-N,N′-Dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (31 microL) was added dropwise and the mixture was affixed with a condenser. The mixture was degassed under vacuum (˜20 mm), filled with N2, and heated to 90° C. The mixture stirred for 3 h at 90° C., cooled to rt, and was diluted with conc NH4OH and water, EtOAc. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc three times and the organic layers were combined. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford a yellow oil. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a 95% CH2Cl2/5% MeOH mixture to afford 118-1 (0.21 g) as a white solid.
To a solution of 118-1 (0.21 g) in CH2Cl2 (2.5 ml) at 0° C. was added pyridine (63 microL), Ac2O (74 microl), and DMAP (5 mg). The mixture was stirred for 1 hour at 0° C., warmed to rt, and stirred for an additional 12 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and the organic layer was washed sequentially with sat. aq. CuSO4 solution, water, and brine. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 118-2 (0.22 g) as a light yellow semisolid. This material was used without further purification.
To a solution of 118-2 (0.22 g) in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) at 0° C. was added TFA (0.6 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0° C. and at rt for 30 min whereupon an additional portion of TFA (0.4 mL) was added. After an additional 1 h at rt, the mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The crude mixture was redissolved in a 10:1 mixture of toluene/CH2Cl2 and concentrated and this protocol was repeated 5 times with to afford 118-3 (0.18 g) as a light yellow solid. This material was used without further purification.
To a solution of 118-3 (80 mg) n CH3CN (1.5 mL) at 0° C. was added 4-(5-oxo-4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4]oxadiazol-3-yl)-phenyl amide (50 mg) followed by EDCI (53 mg) and DMAP (3 mg). The reaction mixture was warmed to rt and stirred for 2.5 h. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and placed under high vacuum. The crude material was purified by reverse phase HPLC using a C18 column and a gradient of (89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H) to afford 118-4 (37 mg) as a white solid.
To a solution of the 118-4 (27 mg) in MeOH (1.5 mL) at 0° C. was added 7M NH3/MeOH (0.5 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0° C. and an additional hour at rt. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and placed under high vacuum to afford 118-5 (25 mg) as a white solid. This material was used without further purification.
To a solution of the 118-5 (25 mg) in a mixture of MeOH/1N HCl (1.5 mL/1.5 mL) was added 10% Pd/C (15 mg). The mixture was stirred under a H2 balloon for 3 h and was filtered thru a pad of Celite. The Celite pad was washed with MeOH and the resultant filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude residue was treated with MeOH followed by dilution with Et2O and the resultant solid was collected by filtration and dried under vacuum to afford Example 118 (24 mg) as a maize crystalline solid.
To a mixture of 2,3-dihydro-5-iodo-1H-isoindol-1-one (1.0 g) in DMF (20 mL) at 0° C. was added NaH (97 mg) in a single portion. The resulting mixture was stirred for 30 min at 0° C. whereupon MeI (0.25 mL) was added dropwise. The mixture was allowed to warm to rt and was stirred for 72 h. The mixture was quenched by addition of sat. aq. NH4Cl (˜3 mL) and was diluted with EtOAc (10 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layers were combined and washed sequentially with water and brine. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (ISCO, 120 g) using a gradient of 100% hexanes to 80:20 hexanes/EtOAc to afford 119-1 (0.78 g) as a light yellow solid.
According to the Step 118-1 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 119-1 (0.20 g) was used instead of 3-trifluoromethoxy iodobenzene 118-1 to obtain 119-2 (0.29 g) as an off-white solid.
According to the Step 118-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 119-2 (0.29 g) was used instead of 118-1 to obtain 119-3 (0.31 g) as an off-white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 119-3 (0.31 g) was used instead of 118-2 to obtain 119-4 (0.27 g) as a white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 119-4 (0.10 g) was used instead of 118-3 to obtain 119-5 (0.11 g) as an off-white solid which was purified by flash chromatography using 15:1 CH2Cl2/MeOH as eluent.
According to the Step 118-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 119-6 (0.11 g) was used instead of 118-4 to obtain 119-6 (95 mg) as a white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 119-5 (0.11 g) was used instead of 118-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 119 (95 mg) as a white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, 119-4 (0.10 g) was treated with tert-butyl 4-aminobenzylcarbamate (80 mg) to afford 120-1 (0.10 g) as yellow semisolid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step 118-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, 120-1 (0.10 g) was used instead of compound 118-4 to obtain 120-2 (90 mg) as a white solid. Crude 120-2 was used without further purification in the next step.
To round bottom flask charged with the 120-2 (90 mg) at rt in CH2Cl2 (1.5 mL) was added TFA (0.5 mL). The resulting solution was stirred for 3 h, concentrated under reduced pressure, and placed under high vacuum. The crude product was dissolved in MeOH and diluted with 1M HCl in Et2O and the resultant solid was collected and dried to afford EXAMPLE 120 (66 mg) at the hydrochloride salt as an off-white solid.
To a solution of t-BuOK (1.3 g) in THF (15 mL) at rt was added 2-(3-iodophenylamino) ethanol 121-1 (3.0 g) prepared from US 2004/0167188 followed by ethyl chloroacetate (1.1 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred for 12 h at rt whereupon an additional portion of t-BuOK (0.6 g) and ethyl chloroacetate (0.5 mL) was added. The mixture was heated to 55° C., stirred for 12 h, and was cooled to rt. The mixture was treated with sat. aq NaHCO3 and water and was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layers were combined, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography using a gradient of 100% hexanes to 20% hexanes/80% EtOAc to afford 121-2 (1.5 g) of the title compound as a light yellow solid.
According to the Step 118-1 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 121-2 (0.72 g) was used in the presence of 68-7 (0.50 g) to obtain 121-3 (0.65 g) as yellow crystalline solid after flash chromatography using a 20:1 mixture of CH2Cl2/MeOH.
According to the Step 118-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 121-3 (0.65 g) was used instead of 118-1 to obtain 121-4 (0.72 g) as an off-white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 121-4 (0.72 g) was used instead of 118-2 to obtain 121-5 (0.60 g) as a light yellow solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, 121-5 (70 mg) was treated with tert-butyl 4-aminobenzylcarbamate (60 mg) to afford 121-6 (45 mg) as an off-white solid after flash chromatography using a 20:1 mixture of CH2Cl2/MeOH as eluent.
According to the Step 118-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, 121-6 (45 mg) was used instead of compound 118-4 to obtain 121-7 (43 mg) as a white solid. Crude 121-7 was used without further purification in the next step.
According to the Step 120-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 120, 121-7 (45 mg) was used instead of compound 120-2 to obtain EXAMPLE 121 (35 mg) as a pale yellow solid after treatment with HCl.
According to the Step 118-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 121-5 (0.25 g) was treated with di-tert-butyl (6-aminoisoquinolin-1-yl)imidocarbonate (0.30 g) from WO 2006/062972 to obtain 122-1 (0.17 g) as a yellow semisolid after reverse-phase purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step 118-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, 122-1 (0.17 g) was used instead of compound 118-4 to obtain 122-2 (0.10 g) as an off-white semisolid after reverse-phase purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
To a solution of 122-2 (0.10 g) in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) at 0° C. was added TFA (0.5 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0° C., warmed to rt, and stirred for an additional 12 h. The mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 and concentrated to dryness and this protocol was repeated 5 times. The crude mixture was purified by reverse phase HPLC using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to afford EXAMPLE 122 (50 mg) as a white solid as the hydrochloride salt upon treatment with HCl.
To a solution of 2-chloro-4-aminobenzonitrile (5 g) in EtOH/H2O (22 mL/4 mL) was added Na2CO3 (2.3 g) and NH2OH.HCl (2.5 g). The mixture was stirred for 8 h at 60° C. where upon an additional portion of both Na2CO3 (2.3 g) and NH2OH.HCl (2.5 g) were added and continued heating at 60° C. for 72 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, filtered, and the resultant precipitate was washed with water, EtOH, and Et2O. The crude precipitate was dried under vacuum to afford 123-1 (4.3 g) as a pale white solid which was used without further purification.
To a solution of 123-1 (2.0 g) in EtOH (10 mL) at rt was added diethyl carbonate (1.3 mL) and the mixture was heated to 65° C. A 21% wt NaOEt soln (7.31 mL) was added dropwise to the solution which was then heated to 70° C. and stirred for 2 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, concentrated to dryness, and dissolved in a minimum amount of water. Concentrated HCl was added dropwise until pH ˜2 and the resultant precipitate was filtered. The precipitate was washed sequentially with water, EtOH, and Et2O to afford 123-2 (1.7 g) as a brown solid. This material was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 121-5 (0.20 g) was used instead of 118-3 to couple with 123-2 (0.13 g) to obtain 123-3 (60 mg) as an off-white solid which was purified by flash chromatography using a CH2Cl2/MeOH mixture.
To a solution of 123-3 (25 mg) in MeOH (2.5 mL) at rt was added 10% Pd/C (6 mg). The mixture was stirred under a H2 balloon for 4.5 h whereupon the mixture was filtered thru a pad of Celite and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by reverse phase HPLC using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to afford 123-4 (8 mg) as an off-white solid.
To a solution of 123-4 (8 mg) in MeOH (1 mL) at rt was added 7M NH3 in MeOH (0.3 mL). The mixture was stirred for 3 h at rt and was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was taken up in MeOH and diluted with 1 M HCl/Et2O to afford EXAMPLE 123 (1.3 mg) as a pale yellow solid.
To a solution of 2-methyl-4-nitrobenzonitrile (5 g) in EtOH/H2O (30 mL/6 mL) was added Na2CO3 (3.6 g) and NH2OH.HCl (4.3 g). The mixture was stirred for 8 h at 60° C. where upon an additional portion of both Na2CO3 (3.6 g) and NH2OH.HCl (4.3 g) were added and continued heating at 60° C. for 72 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, filtered, and the resultant precipitate was washed with water, EtOH, and Et2O. The crude precipitate was dried under vacuum to afford 124-1 (3.4 g) as a pale yellow solid which was used without further purification.
To a solution of 124-1 (2.0 g) in EtOH (10 mL) at rt was added diethyl carbonate (1.3 mL) and the mixture was heated to 65° C. A 21% wt NaOEt soln (7.31 mL) was added dropwise to the solution which was then heated to 70° C. and stirred for 2 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, concentrated to dryness, and dissolved in a minimum amount of water. Concentrated HCl was added dropwise until pH and the resultant precipitate was filtered. The precipitate was washed sequentially with water, EtOH, and Et2O to afford a dark brown solid. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a mixture of CH2Cl2/MeOH to afford 124-2 (0.9 g) as a brown solid.
To a solution of 124-2 (0.44 g) in EtOAc (25 mL) at rt was added SnCl2.H2O (1.7 g) in one portion. The mixture was heated at 80° C. for 12 h, cooled to rt, and quenched with sat. aq NaHCO3. The mixture was filtered thru a pad of Celite and the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 124-3 (0.16 g) as a brown solid. This material was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 121-5 (0.28 g) was used instead of 118-3 to couple with 124-3 (0.16 g) to obtain 124-4 (0.16 g) as an a pale yellow solid after reverse-phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step 118-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 124-4 (0.16 g) was used instead of 118-4 to obtain 124-5 (0.15 g) as a white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 124-5 (0.15 g) was used instead of 118-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 124 (90 mg) of the hydrochloride salt as a white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 121-5 (70 mg) was treated with tert-butyl 6-amino-3,4-dihydroisoquinoline-2(1H)-carboxylate (67 mg) to obtain 125-1 (58 mg) as a yellow solid after flash chromatography purification using a 20:1 mixture of CH2Cl2/MeOH as eluent.
According to the Step 118-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, 125-1 (58 mg) was used instead of compound 118-4 to obtain 125-2 (50 mg) as a white solid which was taken on without further purification.
According to the Step 120-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 120, 125-2 (50 mg) was used instead of compound 120-2 to obtain EXAMPLE 125 (35 mg) as a pale yellow hydrochloride salt upon treatment with HCl.
According to the Step 118-1 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, 68-7 (0.35 g) was treated with ethyl 2-(3-iodophenoxy)acetate (0.56 g) from Eur. J. Org. Chem. 2008, 337 to obtain 126-1 (0.54 g) as an yellow solid after flash chromatography with 40:1 CH2Cl2/MeOH as eluent.
According to the Step 118-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 126-1 (0.54 g) was used instead of 118-1 to obtain 126-2 (0.56 g) as a yellow oil which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 126-2 (0.55 g) was used instead of 118-2 to obtain 126-3 (0.45 g) as a yellow solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 126-3 (0.18 g) was used instead of 118-3 to obtain 126-4 (90 mg) as an off-white solid after purification by reverse-phase HPLC using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step 118-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118 except using 2M NH3 in EtOH, compound 126-4 (85 mg) was used instead of 118-4 to obtain 126-5 (60 mg) as a yellow solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118 except substituting EtOH for MeOH as solvent, compound 126-5 (58 mg) was used instead of 118-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 126 (36 mg) as a maize solid.
According to the Step 118-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, 126-3 (0.18 g) was treated with tert-butyl 4-aminobenzylcarbamate (0.13 g) to afford 127-1 (100 mg) as an yellow semisolid after purification by reverse-phase HPLC using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step 118-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118 except using 2M NH3 in EtOH, 127-1 (0.10 g) was used instead of compound 118-4 to obtain 127-2 (90 mg) as a white solid. Crude 127-2 was used without further purification in the next step.
According to the Step 120-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 120, 127-2 (90 mg) was used instead of compound 120-2 to obtain EXAMPLE 127 (55 mg) as the trifluoroacetate salt as a white solid after purification by reverse-phase HPLC using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:TFA to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:TFA.
To a mixture of 2,3-dihydro-6-iodo-1H-isoindol-1-one (1.0 g) in DMF (20 mL) at 0° C. was added NaH (97 mg) in a single portion. The resulting mixture was stirred for 30 min at 0° C. whereupon MeI (0.25 mL) was added dropwise. The mixture was allowed to warm to rt and was stirred for 72 h. The mixture was quenched by addition of sat. aq. NH4Cl (˜3 mL) and was diluted with EtOAc (10 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layers were combined and washed sequentially with water and brine. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (ISCO, 120 g) using a gradient of 100% hexanes to 80:20 hexanes/EtOAc to afford 128-1 (0.84 g) as a yellow solid.
To a round bottom flask charged with a stir bar was added 68-7 (0.28 g) and 128-1 (0.40 g) in DMSO (8 mL) at rt was added K3PO4 (0.51 g), and CuI (23 mg) under N2. trans-N,N′-Dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (37 microL) was added dropwise and the mixture was affixed with a condenser. The mixture was degassed under vacuum (˜20 mm), filled with N2, and heated to 80° C. The mixture stirred for 2.5 h at 80° C., cooled to rt, and was diluted with EtOAc. The mixture was then sequentially washed with conc NH4OH, water, and brine. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford a yellow oil. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a gradient of 100% CH2Cl2 to 60% CH2Cl2/40% MeOH to afford 128-2 (0.23 g) as a yellow solid.
According to the Step 118-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 128-2 (80 mg) was used instead of 118-1 to obtain 128-3 (85 mg) as an off-white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 128-3 (85 mg) was used instead of 118-2 to obtain 128-4 (65 mg) as a light yellow semisolid solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step 118-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 128-4 (75 mg) was used instead of 118-3 to in the presence of 4-amino-3-ethylbenzonitrile (46 mg) to obtain 128-5 (50 mg) as an off-white solid which was purified by flash chromatography using 20:1 CH2Cl2/MeOH as eluent.
According to the Step 118-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 128-5 (50 mg) was used instead of 118-4 to obtain 128-6 (49 mg) as a white solid which was used without further purification.
To a pressure tube charged with 128-6 (45 mg) in MeOH (3 mL) at 0° C. was added AcCl (3 ml) dropwise. The tube was capped, warmed to rt, and stirred for 12 h. The mixture was concentrated to dryness and the pressure tube was charged with the crude mixture in 7M NH3/MeOH (4 mL). The mixture was stirred for 3 days and was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude mixture was purified by reverse phase HPLC using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to afford EXAMPLE 128 (6 mg) as a white solid as the hydrochloride salt after HCl treatment.
According to the Step 118-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, compound 121-5 (70 mg) was treated with 2-methyl-1H-indol-5-amine (34 mg) to obtain 129-1 (73 mg) as a brown solid after flash chromatography purification using a 20:1 mixture of CH2Cl2/MeOH as eluent.
According to the Step 118-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, 129-1 (73 mg) was used instead of compound 118-4 to obtain EXAMPLE 129 (62 mg) as a brown solid.
To a solution of compound 121-5 (70 mg) in DMF (1.5 mL) was added 2-(4-chlorophenyl)ethanamine (32 mg) followed by HATU (88 mg) and NMM (32 mg). The mixture was stirred at rt for 12 h and was loaded directly onto a reverse-phase HPLC using a C18 column and gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to afford 130-1 (50 mg) as a yellow semisolid.
According to the Step 118-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 118, 130-1 (73 mg) was used instead of compound 118-4 to obtain EXAMPLE 130 (42 mg) as a pale white solid.
EXAMPLE 131 was synthesized similarly as for the synthesis of EXAMPLE 96 using 1-iodo-2-methoxybenzene 1.
EXAMPLE 132 was synthesized similarly as for the synthesis of EXAMPLE 96 using 1-iodo-2-fluorobenzene 1.
EXAMPLE 133 was synthesized similarly as for the synthesis of EXAMPLE 96 using 1-iodo-2-(difluoromethoxy)benzene 1.
To a stirred mixture of 5-aminopicolinonitrile (2.44 g, 20.5 mmol) and Na2CO3 (2.67 g, 25.2 mmol) in EtOH (10 mL) and H2O (2 mL) at 60° C. was added a mixture of hydroxylamine hydrochloride (1.85 g, 26.6 mmol) in H2O (2 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at 60° C. for 16 h. The mixture was cooled down to room temperature. The solids were filtered, washed with water (5 mL), EtOH (5 mL), and ether (5 mL). The solids were dried in vacuo to give 2.41 g of compound 134-1 which was used in the following step without further purification.
To a stirred mixture of compound 134-1 (1.20 g, 7.89 mmol) and Et2CO3 (1.1 mL, 9.5 mmol) in EtOH (8 mL) at ca 65° C. was added a solution of NaOEt (3.3 mL, 8.8 mmol, 20% in EtOH). The resulting mixture was stirred at 70° C. for 1 h. The mixture was cooled down to room temperature and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in water (5 mL) at 70° C. HCl (concentrated) was added until pH 4. The solids were filtered, washed with water (5 mL), EtOH (5 mL), and ether (5 mL). The solids were dried in vacuo to give 253 mg of Compound 134-2 which was used in the following step without further purification.
Compound 134-3 was synthesized similarly as for the synthesis of Compound 91-4 using Compound 121-5 and Compound 134-2.
EXAMPLE 134 was synthesized similarly as for the synthesis of Compound 96, Step 96-2, using Compound 134-3.
To a solution of 3-iodoaniline (2 g, 11 mmol) and Et3N (3 mL, 21 mmol) in DCM (20 mL), 3-chloropropane-1-sulfonyl chloride (1.8 mL, 14.8 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred for 60 h at room temperature, washed with 3M HCl, and evaporated to dryness. The resulting crude mixture was dissolved in DMF (16 mL) and DBU (2 mL, 13.4 mmol) was added. After being stirred for 3 h at room temperature, the reaction mixture was poured into 400 mL of hexane/AcOEt (1/1) and washed with 3M HCl. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to dryness. The crude material was purified by silica gel chromatography (Acetone/Hex 0 to 25%) to give Compound 135-1 (2.4 g, 67%).
To a mixture of 2-bromo-5-fluorophenol (2 g, 10.5 mmol) and potassium carbonate (2.9 g, 21 mmol) in DMF (10 mL), iodomethane (2.27 g, 16 mmol) was added. The mixture was heated to 55° C. and stirred for 16 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and diluted with diethyl ether. The organics were washed with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride, water, dried with Na2SO4, and evaporated to dryness. The crude material was purified by silica gel chromatography (diethyl ether/Hex 0 to 2%) to give Compound 136-1 (1.2 g, 55%).
To a nitrogen purged vessel, a solution of compound 136-1 (0.5 g, 2.4 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (3 mL), sodium iodide (0.72 g, 4.8 mmol), copper iodide (0.023 g, 0.12 mmol), and trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (0.034 g, 0.24 mmol) were added. The vessel was sealed and heated to 115° C. for 65 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, washed with aqueous saturated ammonia chloride, and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organics were dried with Na2SO4 and evaporated to dryness to give Compound 136-2 (0.55 g, 91%) which was used without further purification in the next step.
EXAMPLE 136 was synthesized similarly as for the synthesis of Compound 91, Steps 91-1 to 91-6, using Compound 136-2.
Compound 137-1 was synthesized similarly as for the synthesis of EXAMPLE 136, Step 136-1, using 2-iodophenol and 2-iodopropane.
EXAMPLE 137 was synthesized similarly as for the synthesis of Compound 91, Steps 91-1 to 91-6, using Compound 137-1.
Compound 138-2 was synthesized similarly as for the synthesis of EXAMPLE 136, Step 136-1, using 2-iodophenol and methyl 2-bromoacetate.
EXAMPLE 138 was synthesized similarly as for the synthesis of Compound 91, Steps 91-1 to 91-6, using Compound 138-2.
4-cyano-3-fluoroaniline (10 g, 0.0735 mol) was dissolved in EtOH (36.7 ml) and water (7.3 ml), Na2CO3 (5.06 g, 0.65 eq) was added. The mixture was heated at 60° C. and a solution of NH2OH.HCl (5.615 g, 1.1 eq) in water (7.3 ml) was added slowly, the mixture was heated at 60° C. overnight. The mixture was cooled to 0° C., and the solid collected by filtration. Washed with water (7 ml), EtOH (7 ml), Et2O (20 ml) and dried to give 7.5 g of compound 139-1.
Compound 139-1 was suspended in EtOH (26 ml), diethyl carbonate (5.344 ml, 1 eq) was added and the mixture heated at 65° C. NaOEt (16.5 g of a 21% solution in EtOH, 1.15 eq) added slowly and the mixture heated at 70° C. for 2 hours. Cooled, concentrated and taken up in water (25 ml) at 70° C., HCl(conc) was added to PH2, and the mixture cooled to 0° C. The solid was collected by filtration and washed with water (20 ml), EtOH (7 ml), and ether (20 ml) to give 6.4 g of compound 139-2.
121-5 (1.17 g, 0.00298 mol) and 139-2 (0.698 g, 1.2 eq) dissolved in MeCN (3.98 ml), and cooled to 0° C., EDCI.HCl (0.686 g, 1.2 eq) and DMAP (36 mg, 10%) were added and the mixture stirred overnight. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with NH4Cl(sat), dried, concentrated, silica gel chromatography (0-5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) gave 1.1 g of 139-3
139-3 (0.1 g, 0.000176 mol) dissolved in 5.85 ml MeOH/1 N HCl in ether (4:1), Pd(C) (35 mg) added, placed under H2 1 atm. Stirred for 4 hours, the catalyst was removed by filtration, and the filtrate concentrated. The resulting solid was dissolved in MeOH (5 ml), 7 N NH3 in MeOH (0.176, 7 eq) was added and the mixture stirred for 1 hour. After cooling to rt the mixture was concentrated and then taken up in MeOH (5 ml), 1N HCl added, then the solution concentrated. Trituration with MeOH/Ether followed by filtration gave 76 mg of EXAMPLE 139 as an HCl salt.
Compound 140-2 was synthesized in the manner described for 139-2 as shown in the scheme above from 4-amino-2,6-difluorobenzonitrile (J. Chem. Res. 1998, p 144-145)
Example 140 was synthesized in the manner described for Example 139 as shown in the scheme above from 140-2 and 121-5.
3-iodobenzoic acid (1 g, 0.004032 mol) was dissolved in acetonitrile (20 ml), Cs2CO3 (2.63 g, 2 eq) and benzyl bromide (0.528 ml, 1.1 eq) were added. The mixture was heated at reflux overnight. Cooled to rt and concentrated. The residue was taken up in EtOAc, washed with water, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated. Silica gel chromatography (0-20% EtOAc in hexane) gave 1 g of 141-1.
141-2 was synthesized in a similar manner to 121-5 starting with 141-1
141-2 (1.15 g, 0.0027 mol) and 139-2 (0.63 g, 1.2 eq) dissolved in MeCN (3.6 ml), and cooled to 0° C., EDCI.HCl (0.619 g, 1.2 eq) and DMAP (33 mg, 10%) were added and the mixture stirred overnight. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with NH4Cl(sat), dried, concentrated, silica gel chromatography (0-100% EtOAc in hexane) gave 1.2 g of 141-3.
141-3 (0.2 g, 0.00033 mol) was dissolved in MeOH (5.5 ml), 7N NH3 in MeOH (0.284, 6 eq) was added, stirred for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated and taken up in MeOH (5 ml). 1 M HCl in ether (0.662, 2 eq) was then added. Pd(C) (100 mg) was added and the mixture put under H2 (1 atm) for 1 hour. The catalyst was removed by filtration and the solution concentrated. Trituration with ether/MeOH followed by filtration gave 143 mg of Example 141 as an HCl salt.
To a solution of 121-5 (3.0 g, 7.65 mmol), compound 39-2 (2.7 g, 7.78 mmol, 1 eq.) and DMAP (95 mg, 0.78 mmol, 0.1 eq) in 30 ml of dichloromethane at 0° C. was added EDCI (1.9 g, 9.91 mmol, 1.3 eq) and the mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 2 hr. It was diluted with ethyl acetate, washed twice with 1N HCl then with brine. The solution was dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. The resultant residue was purified by chromatography eluting with 5% methanol in dichloromethane to provide 3.5 g of 142-2.
A solution of 142-2 (5.2 g, 7.20 mmol) in 50 ml of a solution of 7N NH3 in methanol was stirred at rt for 30 min. and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by column chromatography eluting with 5% methanol in dichloromethane to provide 4.87 g of 142-3. (>theoretical weight due to the presence of solvent).
To a flask containing 142-3 (4.7 g, 6.92 mmol) was added 50 ml of a 4 N solution of HCl in dioxane and the resultant slurry was stirred at rt for 1 hr. It was concentrated to dryness and co-evaporated twice with anhydrous toluene. The above solid was taken in 100 ml of ethanol to give a clear solution which was heated at reflux for 10 hr to give a thick slurry. The solvent was evaporated to dryness and the solid was taken in minimum methanol to give a thick paste. To this was added anhydrous ether while being stirred vigorously. The solid was filtered off, washed with ether and dried in a vacuum oven to provide 3.05 of Example 142 as the HCl salt.
Example 143 was prepared using a procedure similar the preparation of EXAMPLE 142.
Compound 144-1 was prepared using a procedure similar to the preparation of compound 142-2.
To a solution of 144-1 (440 mg, 0.872 mmol) in 10 ml ethyl acetate was added 10% Pd—C (80 mg) and the suspension stirred under hydrogen balloon for 2.5 hr, filtered through a CELITE pad to remove the catalyst and the solvent evaporated to dryness to provide 370 mg of 144-2.
To a solution of 144-2 (180 mg, 0.27 mmol), pyrrolidine (45 ul, 0.54 mmol, 2 eq.) and hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate (62 mg, 0.41 mmol, 1.5 q) in 3 ml acetonitrile at rt was added EDCI (78 mg, 0.41 mmol, 1.5 eq.) and the mixture stirred overnight at rt. It was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed twice with 1N HCl and brine. The solution was dried over MgSO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by chromatography eluting with 5% methanol in dichloromethane to provide 160 mg of 144-3.
Compound 144-3 was converted to EXAMPLE 144 using a procedure similar to the conversion of compound 142-2 to EXAMPLE 142 Using procedures similar to the preparation of EXAMPLE 144, the following examples were prepared:
To 50 mg of compound 100-1 in 2 mL of dry DMF was added 68 mg (10 eq.) of sodium azide and 56 mg (10 eq.) of ammonium chloride and the mixture heated to 115° C. in a pressure tube for about 16 hours. The reaction mixture was poured onto 1N aq. HCl and extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried with magnesium sulfate, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding about 20 mg of 148-1.
To about 50 mg of 148-1 in 5 mL of methanol and 3 mL of 1N aq. HCl was added 20 mg of 10% palladium on carbon and the mixture stirred under a balloon of hydrogen gas for two hours. The mixture was filtered and evaporated to dryness. Purification by reversed phase HPLC yielded 18 mg of Example 148.
To 100 mg of 121-5 in about 5 mL of acetonitrile at 0° C. was added 66 mg (1.5 eq.) of 149-1 (WO2005059107(A2,A3)), 64 mg (1.3 eq.) of EDCI and 3 mg (10% mole) of DMAP and the mixture stirred under a balloon of argon for two hours. The reaction mixture was poured onto water and extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried with magnesium sulfate, filtered and evaporated to dryness. Purification by flash chromatography yielded 121 mg of amide.
To this was added about 5 mL of 7M ammonia in methanol and the mixture stirred in a flask sealed with a septa for two hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness and the residue was dissolved in 5 mL of dry DCM. The solution was cooled to 0° C. then 5 mL of trifluoroacetic acid was added and the mixture stirred under a balloon of argon for two hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness and the residue dissolved in DCM and precipitated from 1N HCl in diethyl ether yielding 71 mg of Example 149 after drying in a vacuum oven.
To a mixture of (R)-tert-butyl 2-hydroxy-2-((R)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)acetate (1.0 g, 4.32 mmol), pentafluoro-(4-iodophenyl)-sulfur (6.36 mmol, 1.5 eq.), powdered potassium carbonate (1.2 g, 8.68 mmol, 2 eq.) in 30 ml dioxane was added copper(I) iodide (83 mg, 0.436 mmol, 0.1 eq.) followed by trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (140 microl, 0.886 mmol, 0.2 eq.). The mixture was degassed by bubbling with argon and heated in a sealed tube 110° C. for about 10 hr. It was filtered through a CELITE pad, rinsed with ethyl acetate, concentrated and purified by chromatography eluting with a mixture of ethyl acetate-dichloromethane-hexane (1:1:3 v/v/v) to provide 1.20 g of 150-1
To a solution of 150-1 (420 mg, 0.97 mmol), DMAP (12 mg, 0.098 mmol, 0.1 eq.) and pyridine (160 microl, 1.98 mmol, 2 eq.) in 10 ml dichloromethane at 0° C. was added acetic anhydride (185 microl, 1.96 mmol, 2 eq.). The mixture was stirred for 2.5 hr, diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with aqueous copper sulfate, water and brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to provide 480 mg of the acylated product. The above product was stirred with 5 ml each of dichloromethane and trifluoroacetic acid at rt for 1 hr, added toluene and concentrated to dryness. It was evaporated once more time from toluene then twice from ether to provide 460 mg (>theoretical yield due to the presence of some solvent) of 150-2.
To solution of 150-2 (250 mg, 0.596 mmol), 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(4H)-one (160 mg, 0.903 mmol, 1.5 eq.), DMAP (7.3 mg, 0.050 mmol, 0.1 eq.) in 5 ml acetonitrile at 0° C. was added EDCI (150 mg 0.782 mmol, 1.3 eq.) and stirred for 2.5 hr. It was diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with aq. NaHCO3, water, and brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by chromatography eluting with 5% methanol in dichloromethane to provide 225 mg of 150-3.
A solution of 150-3 (225 mg) in 10 ml of a 7N ammonia in methanol was stirred at rt for 1 hr and concentrated to dryness. To this was added 210 mg of 10% Pd—C, 6 ml each of methanol and 1N hydrochloric acid. The suspension was stirred under a hydrogen balloon for 2 hr, filtered through a CELITE pad, concentrated and purified by RPHPLC to provide 130 mg of EXAMPLE 150 as the hydrochloride salt.
EXAMPLE 151 was prepared using a procedure similar to the preparation of EXAMPLE 150.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 4-iodobenzoic acid and thiomorpholine-1,1-dione were used to obtain compound 152-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 152-1 (348 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 152-2 (232 mg, 0.50 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 152-2 (232 mg, 0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 152-3 (242 mg, 0.47 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 152-2 (242 mg, 0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 152-3 (0.47 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 152-3 (0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 152-4 (0.47 mmol).
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 152-4 (0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 152-5 (0.47 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 152-5 (0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain EXAMPLE 152 (206 mg, 0.39 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 4-iodobenzoic acid and dimethylamine were used to obtain compound 153-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 153-1 (244 mg, 0.89 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 153-2 (181 mg, 0.48 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 153-2 (181 mg, 0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 153-3 (80 mg, 0.19 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 153-3 (80 mg, 0.19 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 153-4 (0.19 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 153-4 (0.19 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 153-5 (77 mg, 0.15 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 153-5 (77 mg, 0.15 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 153-6 (0.15 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 153-6 (0.15 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 153 (62 mg, 0.14 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-1 in the synthetic method for compound 78-1, 4-iodobenzenesulfonyl chloride and dimethylamine were used to obtain compound 154-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 154-1 (222 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 154-2 (147 mg, 0.36 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 154-2 (147 mg, 0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 154-3 (131 mg, 0.29 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 154-3 (131 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 154-4 (0.29 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 154-4 (0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 154-5 (120 mg, 0.21 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 154-5 (120 mg, 0.21 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 154-6 (0.21 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 154-6 (0.21 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 154 (41 mg, 0.086 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 3-iodobenzoic acid and dimethylamine were used to obtain compound 155-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 155-1 (196 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 155-2 (156 mg, 0.41 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 155-2 (156 mg, 0.41 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 155-3 (0.41 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 155-3 (0.41 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 155-4 (0.41 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 155-4 (0.41 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 155-5 (171 mg, 0.33 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 155-5 (171 mg, 0.33 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 155-6 (0.33 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 155-6 (0.33 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 155 (143 mg, 0.33 mmol) as a white amorphous solid. Synthesis of 4-[(2-fluoro-5-iodophenyl)carbonyl]morpholine 173-1
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid and morpholine were used to obtain compound 156-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 156-1 (287 mg, 0.86 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 156-2 (251 mg, 0.57 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 156-2 (287 mg, 0.57 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 156-3 (0.57 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 156-3 (0.57 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 156-4 (0.57 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 156-4 (0.57 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 156-5 (289 mg, 0.50 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 156-5 (289 mg, 0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 156-6 (0.50 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 156-6 (0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 156 (242 mg, 0.48 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 4-iodobenzoic acid and dimethyl-D6-amine were used to obtain compound 157-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 157-1 (134 mg, 0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 157-2 (100 mg, 0.26 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 157-2 (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 157-3 (106 mg, 0.25 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 157-3 (106 mg, 0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 157-4 (0.25 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 157-4 (0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 157-5 (0.25 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 157-5 (0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 157-6 (0.25 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 157-6 (0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 157 (89 mg, 0.20 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 3-iodobenzoic acid and dimethyl-D6-amine were used to obtain compound 158-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 158-1 (134 mg, 0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 158-2 (122 mg, 0.32 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 158-2 (122 mg, 0.32 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 158-3 (130 mg, 0.31 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 158-3 (130 mg, 0.31 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 158-4 (0.31 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 158-4 (0.31 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 158-5 (72 mg, 0.14 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 158-5 (72 mg, 0.14 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 158-6 (0.14 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 158-6 (0.14 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 158 (56 mg, 0.13 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid and dimethylamine were used to obtain compound 159-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 159-1 (209 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 159-2 (171 mg, 0.43 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 159-2 (171 mg, 0.43 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 159-3 (0.43 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 159-3 (0.43 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 159-4 (0.43 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 159-4 (0.43 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 159-5 (170 mg, 0.31 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 159-5 (170 mg, 0.31 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 159-6 (0.31 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 159-6 (0.31 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 159 (131 mg, 0.29 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 2 (169 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 160-1 (103 mg, 0.30 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 160-1 (103 mg, 0.30 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 160-2 (112 mg, 0.29 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 160-2 (112 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 160-3 (0.29 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 160-3 (0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 160-4 (44 mg, 0.091 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 160-4 (44 mg, 0.091 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 160-5 (0.091 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 160-5 (0.091 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 160 (30 mg, 0.075 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 2 (169 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 161-1 (95 mg, 0.25 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 161-1 (95 mg, 0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 161-2 (0.25 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 161-2 (0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 161-3 (0.25 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 161-3 (0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 161-4 (64 mg, 0.13 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 161-4 (64 mg, 0.13 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 161-5 (0.13 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 161-5 (0.13 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 161 (39 mg, 0.097 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid and pyrrolidine were used to obtain compound 162-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 162-1 (228 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 162-2 (226 mg, 0.54 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 162-2 (226 mg, 0.54 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 162-3 (244 mg, 0.53 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 162-3 (244 mg, 0.53 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 162-4 (0.53 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 162-4 (0.53 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 162-5 (281 mg, 0.50 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 162-5 (281 mg, 0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 162-6 (0.50 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 162-6 (0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 162 (220 mg, 0.46 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 5-iodo-2-methylbenzoic acid and dimethylamine were used to obtain compound 163-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 163-1 (206 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 163-2 (208 mg, 0.53 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 163-2 (208 mg, 0.53 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 163-3 (232 mg, 0.53 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 163-3 (232 mg, 0.53 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 163-4 (0.53 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 163-4 (0.53 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 163-5 (260 mg, 0.48 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 163-5 (260 mg, 0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 163-6 (0.48 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 163-6 (0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 163 (197 mg, 0.43 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 5-iodo-2-methylbenzoic acid and morpholine were used to obtain compound 164-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 164-1 (236 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 164-2 (250 mg, 0.58 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 164-2 (250 mg, 0.58 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 164-3 (219 mg, 0.46 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 164-3 (219 mg, 0.46 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 164-4 (0.46 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 164-4 (0.46 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 164-5 (240 mg, 0.41 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 164-5 (240 mg, 0.41 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 164-6 (0.41 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 164-6 (0.41 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 164 (186 mg, 0.38 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 5-iodo-2-methylbenzoic acid and pyrrolidine were used to obtain compound 165-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 165-1 (225 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 165-2 (241 mg, 0.58 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 165-2 (241 mg, 0.58 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 165-3 (264 mg, 0.57 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 165-3 (264 mg, 0.57 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 165-4 (0.57 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 165-4 (0.57 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 165-5 (247 mg, 0.44 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 165-5 (247 mg, 0.44 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 165-6 (0.44 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 165-6 (0.44 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 165 (197 mg, 0.41 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 3-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid and pyrrolidine were used to obtain compound 166-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 166-1 (262 mg, 0.82 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 166-2 (213 mg, 0.50 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 166-2 (213 mg, 0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 166-3 (0.50 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 166-3 (0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 166-4 (0.50 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 166-4 (0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 166-5 (275 mg, 0.49 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 169-5 (275 mg, 0.49 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 166-6 (0.49 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 166-6 (0.49 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 166 (225 mg, 0.37 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 3-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid and morpholine were used to obtain compound 167-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 167-1 (298 mg, 0.89 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 167-2 (208 mg, 0.47 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 167-2 (208 mg, 0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 167-3 (197 mg, 0.41 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 167-3 (197 mg, 0.41 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 167-4 (0.41 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 167-4 (0.41 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 167-5 (221 mg, 0.38 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 167-5 (221 mg, 0.38 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 167-6 (0.38 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 167-6 (0.38 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 167 (184 mg, 0.37 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 3-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid and dimethylamine were used to obtain compound 168-1.
According to Step 77-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 168-1 (209 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-1 to obtain compound 168-2 (178 mg, 0.45 mmol).
According to Step 77-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 168-2 (178 mg, 0.45 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-2 to obtain compound 168-3 (0.45 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 77-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 168-3 (0.45 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-3 to obtain compound 168-4 (110 mg, 0.22 mmol).
According to Step 77-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 77, compound 168-4 (110 mg, 0.22 mmol) was used instead of compound 77-4 to obtain compound EXAMPLE 168 (71 mg, 0.16 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 3-iodo-2-methylbenzoic acid and dimethylamine were used to obtain compound 169-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 169-1 (206 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 169-2 (91 mg, 0.23 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 169-2 (91 mg, 0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 169-3 (0.23 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 169-3 (0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 169-4 (0.23 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 169-4 (0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 169-5 (80 mg, 0.15 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 169-5 (80 mg, 0.15 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 169-6 (0.15 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 169-6 (0.15 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 169 (51 mg, 0.11 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 3-iodobenzoic acid and piperidine were used to obtain compound 170-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 170-1 (225 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 170-2 (198 mg, 0.47 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 170-2 (198 mg, 0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 170-3 (0.47 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 170-3 (0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 170-4 (0.47 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 170-4 (0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 170-5 (249 mg, 0.44 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 170-5 (249 mg, 0.44 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 170-6 (0.44 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 170-6 (0.44 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 170 (194 mg, 0.41 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 3-iodobenzoic acid and azetidine were used to obtain compound 171-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 171-1 (205 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 171-2 (121 mg, 0.31 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 171-2 (121 mg, 0.31 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 171-3 (111 mg, 0.26 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 171-3 (111 mg, 0.26 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 171-4 (0.26 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 171-4 (0.26 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 171-5 (112 mg, 0.21 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 171-5 (112 mg, 0.21 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 171-6 (0.21 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 171-6 (0.21 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 171 (88 mg, 0.20 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 3-iodobenzoic acid and (2R,5R)-(−)-trans-dimethylpyrrolidine were used to obtain compound 172-1.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 172-1 (190 mg, 0.58 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 172-2 (98 mg, 0.23 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 172-2 (98 mg, 0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 172-3 (85 mg, 0.18 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 172-3 (85 mg, 0.18 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 172-4 (0.18 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 172-4 (0.18 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 172-5 (103 mg, 0.18 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 172-5 (103 mg, 0.18 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 172-6 (0.18 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 172-6 (0.18 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 172 (83 mg, 0.17 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, 3-fluoro-5-iodobenzene (79 mg, 0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 173-1 (87 mg, 0.27 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 173-1 (87 mg, 0.27 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 173-2 (98 mg, 0.27 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 173-2 (98 mg, 0.27 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 173-3 (0.27 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 173-3 (0.27 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 173-4 (0.27 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 173-4 (0.27 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 173-5 (0.27 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 173-5 (0.27 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 173 (81 mg, 0.21 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, 3,4,5-trifluoro-5-iodobenzene (93 mg, 0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 174-1 (54 mg, 0.15 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 174-1 (117 mg, 0.32 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 174-2 (121 mg, 0.30 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 174-2 (121 mg, 0.30 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 174-3 (0.30 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 174-3 (0.30 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 169-4 (151 mg, 0.30 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 174-4 (151 mg, 0.30 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 174-5 (0.30 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 174-5 (0.30 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 174 (48 mg, 0.10 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, 3,4-difluoro-5-iodobenzene (86 mg, 0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 175-1 (54 mg, 0.13 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 175-1 (94 mg, 0.27 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 175-2 (88 mg, 0.23 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 175-2 (88 mg, 0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 175-3 (0.23 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 175-3 (0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 175-4 (0.23 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 175-4 (0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 175-5 (0.23 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 175-5 (0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 175 (99 mg, 0.23 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, 2,6-difluoropyridine (174 mg, 0.72 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 176-1 (42 mg, 0.12 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 176-1 (55 mg, 0.16 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 176-2 (63 mg, 0.16 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 176-2 (63 mg, 0.16 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 176-3 (0.16 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 176-3 (0.16 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 176-4 (73 mg, 0.15 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 176-4 (73 mg, 0.15 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 176-5 (0.15 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 176-5 (0.15 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 176 (13 mg, 0.032 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, 2,3-difluoropyridine (174 mg, 0.72 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 177-1 (106 mg, 0.31 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 177-1 (150 mg, 0.44 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 177-2 (95 mg, 0.25 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 177-2 (95 mg, 0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 177-3 (0.25 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 177-3 (0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 177-4 (123 mg, 0.25 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 177-4 (123 mg, 0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 177-5 (0.25 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 177-5 (0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 177 (65 mg, 0.15 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, benzyl 4-iodobenzoate (122 mg, 0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 178-1 (110 mg, 0.25 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 178-1 (110 mg, 0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 178-2 (111 mg, 0.23 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 178-2 (111 mg, 0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 178-3 (0.23 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 178-3 (0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 169-4 (132 mg, 0.23 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 178-4 (132 mg, 0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 178-5 (0.23 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 178-5 (0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 178 (61 mg, 0.15 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1 in the synthetic method for compound 77, 3-iodobenzoic acid and sarcosine benzyl ester were used to obtain compound 179-1.
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 179-1 (189 mg, 0.46 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 179-2 (150 mg, 0.29 mmol).
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 179-2 (150 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 179-3 (139 mg, 0.25 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 179-3 (139 mg, 0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 179-4 (0.25 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 179-4 (0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 179-5 (166 mg, 0.25 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 179-5 (252 mg, 0.38 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 179-6 (145 mg, 0.24 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 179-6 (145 mg, 0.24 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 179 (54 mg, 0.11 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, benzyl 3-iodobenzoate (122 mg, 0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 180-1 (127 mg, 0.29 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 180-1 (127 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 180-2 (127 mg, 0.26 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 180-2 (127 mg, 0.26 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 180-3 (0.26 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 180-3 (0.26 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 180-4 (0.26 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 180-4 (0.26 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 180-5 (130 mg, 0.24 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 180-5 (130 mg, 0.24 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 180 (64 mg, 0.16 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, methyl 4-iodobenzoate (123 mg, 0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 181-1 (142 mg, 0.39 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 181-1 (142 mg, 0.39 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 181-2 (145 mg, 0.37 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 181-2 (145 mg, 0.37 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 181-3 (0.37 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 181-3 (0.37 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 181-4 (0.37 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 181-4 (0.37 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 181-5 (143 mg, 0.31 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 181-5 (143 mg, 0.31 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 181 (125 mg, 0.29 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, methyl 3-iodobenzoate (123 mg, 0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 182-1 (91 mg, 0.25 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 182-1 (91 mg, 0.25 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 182-2 (90 mg, 0.22 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 182-2 (90 mg, 0.22 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 182-3 (0.22 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 182-3 (0.22 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 182-4 (106 mg, 0.21 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 182-4 (106 mg, 0.21 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 182-5 (67 mg, 0.14 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 182-5 (67 mg, 0.14 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 182 (61 mg, 0.14 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, benzyl 2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoate (167 mg, 0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 183-1 (89 mg, 0.19 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 183-1 (89 mg, 0.19 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 183-2 (91 mg, 0.18 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 183-2 (91 mg, 0.18 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 183-3 (0.18 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 183-3 (0.18 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 183-4 (80 mg, 0.13 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 183-4 (80 mg, 0.13 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 183-5 (0.13 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 183-5 (0.13 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 183 (11 mg, 0.026 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound 179-5 (184 mg, 0.28 mmol) in methanol (1.4 mL) and water (1.1 mL) was added triethylamine (280 mg, 2.8 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. Solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by RP-HPLC to afford compound 184-1 (45 mg, 0.083 mmol).
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 184-1 (45 mg, 0.083 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 184 (35 mg, 0.07 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 2 (137 mg, 0.39 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 185-1 (154 mg, 0.34 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 185-1 (154 mg, 0.34 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-2 to obtain compound 185-2 (77 mg, 0.31 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 185-2 (77 mg, 0.31 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 185-3 (0.31 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 185-3 (0.31 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 185-4 (0.31 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 185-4 (0.31 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 185-5 (0.31 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 185-5 (0.31 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 185 (69 mg, 0.16 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 78-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, benzyl 3-fluoro-5-iodobenzoate (957 mg, 2.67 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 186-1 (826 mg, 1.80 mmol).
According to Step 78-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 186-1 (826 mg, 1.80 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-1 to obtain compound 186-2 (840 mg, 1.68 mmol).
According to Step 78-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 186-2 (180 mg, 0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-3 to obtain compound 186-3 (0.36 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 186-3 (0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-4 to obtain compound 186-4 (208 mg, 0.34 mmol).
According to Step 78-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 186-4 (208 mg, 0.34 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-5 to obtain compound 186-5 (0.34 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 78-7 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 78, compound 186-5 (0.34 mmol) was used instead of compound 78-6 to obtain EXAMPLE 186 (34 mg, 0.079 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 187 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 3-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 187 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from phthalimide instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 188 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 4-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 188 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from 2-methyl-4-nitro-benzoic acid instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 189 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 2-indanone instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 189 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from 2-indanone instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 190 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 2-indanone instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 190 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from 2-indanone instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 208 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 3,4-dihydro-2(1H)-quinolinone instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 191 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from 3,4-dihydro-2(1H)-quinolinone instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 192 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 3-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 192 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from phthalimide instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 193 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 4-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 193 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from 2-methyl-4-nitro-benzoic acid instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 194 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 2-indanone instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 194 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from 2-indanone instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 195 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 2-indanone instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 195 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from 2-indanone instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 196 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 3,4-dihydro-2(1H)-quinolinone instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 196 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from 3,4-dihydro-2(1H)-quinolinone instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 197 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 3-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 197 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from phthalimide instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 198 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 3-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 198 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from phthalimide instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 199 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 3-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 199 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from phthalimide instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 200 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 2,3-dihydro-5-iodo-1H-isoindole-1-one instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 39, EXAMPLE 200 can be prepared using corresponding aniline derived from methyl 2-methyl-4-nitrobenzoate instead of 4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)aniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 201 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 1-iodo-2-(difluoromethoxy)benzene instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 202 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 1-fluoro-2-iodobenzene instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 203 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 1-fluoro-4-iodobenzene instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 204 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 1-fluoro-3-iodobenzene instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 205 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 1,2-difluoro-4-iodobenzene instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 206 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 1,3-difluoro-5-iodobenzene instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 207 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 1,2,3-difluoro-5-iodobenzene instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 208 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 1-iodo-4-trifluoromethylbenzene instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 209 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 1-iodo-3-trifluoromethylbenzene instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 210 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 211 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 212 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 213 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 3-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 214 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 3-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 215 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 3-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 216 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 3-iodobenzoic acid instead of 3-iodoaniline.
According to the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 142, EXAMPLE 217 can be prepared using corresponding carboxylic acid derived from 1-chloro-4-iodobenzene instead of 3-iodoaniline.
1H NMR (DMSO-d6, 400 MHz): δ 10.2 (s, 1H), 9.22 (s, 2H), 8.89 (s,
1H NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz): δ 8.19 (d, J = 1.7 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (dd, J = 8.0 Hz,
1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 8.23 (d, J = 1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (dd, J = 8.0 Hz,
To a solution of 4-tert-butylaniline (5.00 g) in MeOH (100 mL) was added 40% chroloacetaldehyde solution in water (8.24 mL) and AcOH (3.84 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred for 15 minutes at the same temperature, sodium acetoxyborohydride (NaBH(OAc)3; 14.2 g) was added into the reaction mixture at one portion and the mixture was stirred for 15 minutes.
The reaction mixture was diluted with water and was extracted with EtOAc. The extract was washed with water, sat.NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was dried with anhyd. Na2SO4. It was filtrated to remove insoluble matters and it was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel flush chromatography (NH-type, eluent:Hexane) to obtain aa1-1 (4.8 g) as pale yellow oil.
To a solution of (+)-Diacetyl-L-tartaric anhydride (9.15 g) in dry DMF (100 mL), was added 4-aminobenzonitrile (5 g) under ice cooling and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight to obtain compound aa1-2. The solution of compound aa1-2 was used in the next step without any treatment.
The above DMF solution of aa1-2 (25.4 mL) was diluted with CH2Cl2 (25.4 mL). The internal temperature of the mixture was kept below −70° C. over all additions with dry ice bath.
Oxalyl chloride (1.0 mL) in CH2Cl2 (3 mL) was added dropwise into the reaction mixture. After stirring for 1 hour, pyridine (3.67 mL) was added dropwise thereto and stirred for 15 min. Then compound aa1-1 (2.28 g) in CH2Cl2 (13.7 mL) was added dropwise into the reaction mixture. The mixture was stirred below −70° C. for 12 hours.
The reaction mixture was quenched with water and was extracted with EtOAc. The extract was washed with water, 1N HCl, sat.NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was dried with anhyd. Na2SO4. It was filtrated and was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel flush chromatography (eluent:Hexane:EtOAc=90:10˜25:75) to obtain 1-3 (1.19 g) as a white amorphous solid.
To a solution of aa1-3 (0.3 g) in MeOH (6 mL), was added 8N NH3/MeOH (0.36 mL) at 0° C. and the mixture was stirred for 10 minutes in the same temperature. The mixture was concentrated and was dried in vacuo to obtain crude aa1-4. The crude aa1-4 was used in the next step without further purification.
The crude aa1-4 was dissolved in t-BuOH (4.5 mL)-DMSO (3 mL), and t-BuOK (191 mg) was added portionwise into the reaction mixture at 0° C. The mixture was stirred for 5 minutes in the same temperature.
To the reaction mixture was added 1N HCl and Et2O to obtain precipitate. Then the precipitate was collected by filtration, was rinsed with water, was washed with Et2O and was dried in vacuo to obtain aa1-5 (115 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
A mixture of compound aa1-5 (0.15 g) in CH2Cl2-MeOH (10-50 mL) was bubbled with HCl gas at 0° C. for 1 h. Then the mixture was left at room temperature overnight. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo. Then the resulting mixture was solved in MeOH (10 mL) and 2M MeNH2 in THF (0.74 mL) were added into the mixture at 0° C. The solution was stirred at room temperature overnight. The solvent was removed and the resulting residue was purified by preparative LC/MS to obtain EXAMPLE aa1 (15 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
To a suspension of 5-iodo-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one (3 g) in DMF (60 mL), were added N,N-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP: 14 mg), Et3N (4.84 mL) and tert-butyl-diphenylsilyl chloride (9.0 mL). The mixture was stirred at 50° C. for 2 h. After cooling, saturated NaHCO3 aq. was added into the reaction mixture. Then it was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water and brine, then was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The trituration with Et2O followed by filtration gave compound aa2-1 (2.78 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
The mixture of (R)-tert-butyl (2-hydroxy-2-(R)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)acetate (1.2 g) and compound 2-1 (2.71 g) were solved in degassed DMSO (17 mL). Then crushed K3PO4 (2.2 g) and CuI (0.2 g) were added into the mixture. Then trans-N,N-dimethyl cyclohexanediamine (0.49 mL) was immediately added into the mixture. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h, then CuI (0.1 g) and trans-N,N-dimethyl cyclohexanediamine (0.29 mL) were added to complete the reaction. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for more 2 h. Then, 1N HCl was added to the mixture and it was extracted with EtOAc. The organic solvent was washed with water and brine. It was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel flash column chromatography (Hexane/EtOAc=100/0-50/50) to obtain compound aa2-2 (1.40 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
To the solution of compound aa2-2 (0.1 g) and DMAP (2.0 mg) in CH2Cl2 (1.7 mL), were added pyridine (27 uL) and Ac2O (31 uL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 75 min. Then the mixture was diluted with EtOAc, the organic layer was washed with 5% CuSO4 aq., water and brine. It was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound aa2-3 (101 mg) as a white amorophous solid. It was used to the next step without further purification.
To a solution of compound aa2-3 (91 mg) in CH2Cl2 (0.6 mL), was added trifluoroacetic acid (TFA: 2.4 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo. The resulting residue was co-evaporated with CH2Cl2, several times. Then trituration with Et2O gave compound aa2-4 (46 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
To the suspension of compound aa2-4 (40 mg), N-[(5-amino-2-cyanophenyl)methyl]-N-[(2-methylpropan-2-yl)oxycarbonyl]carbamate (39.9 mg) and DMAP (1.4 mg) in CH2Cl2 (1.1 mL), were added WSC—HCl (28.6 mg) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 4 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and the organic layer was washed with 1N HCl and brine. It was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel flash column chromatography (EtOAc/MeOH=100/0-90/10) to obtain compound aa2-5 (26 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
A solution of compound aa2-5 (25.9 mg) in 8N NH3-MeOH (1 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. Then the solvent was removed in vacuo. Acetonitrile was added to the resulting residue and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo to obtain compound aa2-6 (23 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
Compound aa2-6 (23 mg) was suspended in 4N HCl-dioxane (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h and evaporated. The residue was co-evaporated with toluene (2 times) to obtain compound aa2-7 (17 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
A solution of compound aa2-7 (15 mg) in EtOH (3 mL) was refluxed for 7 h 30 m. After cooling, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo and trituration with Et2O followed by filtration gave EXAMPLE aa2 (14.8 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, 6-iodo-1H-quinolin-2-one (2.00 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa3-1 (1.13 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa3-1 (1.00 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa3-2 (0.85 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa3-2 (0.80 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa3-3 (0.56 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa3-3 (0.10 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa3-4 (47 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa3-4 (45 mg) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa3-5 (35 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa3-5 (35 mg) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa3-6 (25 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa3-6 (25 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa3 (20 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
A mixture of 2-iodo-5-nitrophenol (8.98 g), K2CO3 (18.7 g) and 2-chloro-2,2-difluoro-acetic acid sodium salt (5.17 g) in DMF-H2O (60-6 mL) was stirred at 110° C. for 3.5 h and at room temperature for 12 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with 1H HCl, saturated NaHCO3 aq., water and brine, and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (Hexane/EtOAc=9/1) to obtain compound aa4-1 (9.17 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
A mixture of compound aa4-1 (8 g) and Na2S2O4 in THF-EtOH—H2O (150-75-225 mL) was stirred at 0° C. for 1 h and at room temperature for 6 h. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc and the organic layer was washed with H2O, brine. It was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound aa4-2 (2.36 g) as brown oil. It was used to the next step without further purification.
To a solution of compound aa4-2 (2.35 g) and pyridine (1.33 mL) in CH2Cl2 (60 mL), was added dropwise 3-ethoxy-2-propenoyl chloride (1.33 g) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 5 min and at room temperature for 20 min. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo, and the resulting residue was solved in EtOAt and the organic layer was washed with 1N HCl, saturated NaHCO3 aq., water and brine, and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound aa4-3 (3.2 g) as brown oil. It was used to the next step without further purification.
To compound aa4-3 (3.15 g), conc. H2SO4 was added dropwise at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 10 min then it was poured into crashed ice. The mixture was diluted with water and it was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with saturated NaHCO3 aq., water and brine, and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound aa4-4 (2.06 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid. It was used to the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa4-4 (1.91 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa4-5 (0.6 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa4-5 (0.59 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa4-6 (0.58 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa4-6 (0.57 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa4-7 (0.53 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa4-7 (0.35 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa4-8 (97 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa4-8 (96 mg) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa4-9 (88 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa4-9 (82 mg) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa4-10 (59 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa4-10 (57 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa4 (39 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound aa3-3 (100 mg) in DMF (2.5 mL), was added oxalyl chloride (48 uL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 0.5 h, then CH2Cl2 (2.5 mL) and pyridine (95.5 uL) were added into the reaction mixture at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 0.5 h, then 3-(4-aminophenyl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5(2H)-one (60.2 mg) was added into the mixture at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 days. Then water and 1N HCl were added into the reaction mixture and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water and brine, and was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound aa5-1 (77 mg) as a beige amorphous solid. It was used to the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa5-1 (75 mg) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa5-2 (44 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
To the solution of compound aa5-2 (40 mg) in 1N HCl-dioxane/MeOH-MeOH (=0.34-40 mL), was added 10% palladium charcoal (Pd/C: 40 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred under hydrogen gas atmosphere for 1 h. MeOH (20 mL) was added into the reaction mixture and the mixture was stirred for more 1.5 h to complete the reaction. Then Pd/C was removed by filtration with Celite® pad and rinsed with MeOH. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and trituration with MeOH/Et2O followed by filtration gave EXAMPLE aa5 (30 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 5-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa5, 3-fluoro-4-(5-oxo-2H-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)aniline (55 mg) was used instead of 4-(5-oxo-2H-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)aniline to obtain compound aa6-1 (31 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa6-1 (30 mg) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa6-2 (28 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 5-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa5, compound aa6-2 (22 mg) was used instead of aa5-2 to obtain EXAMPLE aa6 (19 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 4-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa4, (E)-N-(3-iodophenyl)-3-ethoxyprop-2-enamide (13.00 g) was used instead of aa4-3 to obtain compound aa7-1 (11.2 g) as a colorless powder.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa7-1 (4.00 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa7-2 (1.76 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa7-2 (0.83 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa7-3 (0.64 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa7-3 (0.63 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa7-4 (0.50 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 and 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa7-4 (1.0 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa7-5 (0.39 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa7-5 (0.38 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa7-6 (0.27 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa7-6 (0.27 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa7 (0.27 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound aa7-1 (1 g) in DMF (18 mL), was added 60% NaH (0.22 g) at 0° C. and the mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 15 min. Then MeI (0.46 mL) was added into the reaction mixture at 0° C. and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. After the reaction, water and 1N HCl were added into the reaction mixture at 0° C. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc and the organic layer was washed with saturated NaHCO3 aq. and brine, and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain the crude product. Trituration with hexane followed by filtration gave compound aa8-1 (0.73 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa8-1 (0.71 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa8-2 (0.43 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa8-2 (0.45 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa8-3 (0.46 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa8-3 (0.45 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa8-4 (0.48 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa8-4 (0.47 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa8-5 (0.52 g) as a yellow amorphous.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa8-5 (0.51 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa8-6 (0.47 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa8-6 (0.46 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa8-7 (0.35 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa8-7 (0.34 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa8 (0.33 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 8-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa8, (bromomethyl)cyclopropane (1.00 g) was used instead of iodomethane to obtain compound aa9-1 (0.48 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa9-1 (0.47 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa9-2 (0.34 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa9-2 (0.34 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa9-3 (0.37 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa9-3 (0.36 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa9-4 (0.32 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa9-4 (0.32 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa9-5 (0.42 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa9-5 (0.41 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa9-6 (0.38 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa9-6 (0.39 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa9-7 (0.30 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa9-7 (0.30 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa9 (0.24 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
EXAMPLE aa10
According to the Step 8-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa8, methyl bromoacetate (1.75 ml) was used instead of iodomethane to obtain compound aa10-1 (1.76 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa10-1 (1.69 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa10-2 (1.52 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa10-2 (1.50 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa10-3 (1.77 g) as a pale yellow amorphous.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa10-3 (1.63 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa10-4 (1.69 g) as a pale yellow amorphous.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa10-4 (1.00 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa10-5 (1.13 g) as a pale yellow amorphous.
To a solution of compound aa10-5 (0.4 g) in MeOH (5.3 mL), was added 28% NaOMe in MeOH (0.13 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 15 min. Then water was added into the mixture and it was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound aa10-6 (0.34 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid. It was used to the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa10-6 (0.32 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa10-7 (0.22 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa10-7 (0.21 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa10 (0.20 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound aa10-5 (0.4 g) in MeOH (5 mL), was added 1N NaOH (5 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 35 min. Then water and 1N HCl were added into the mixture and it was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (CH2Cl2/MeOH=95/5) to obtain compound aa11-1 (0.18 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa11-1 (0.18 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa11-2 (0.13 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa11-2 (0.13 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa11 (0.11 g) as a white amorphous solid.
EXAMPLE aa12
According to the Step 4-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa4, 3-Iodo-2-methylaniline (0.50 g) was used instead of aa4-2 to obtain compound aa12-1 (0.68 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 4-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa4, compound aa12-1 (0.68 g) was used instead of aa4-3 to obtain compound aa12-2 (0.47 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa12-2 (0.20 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa12-3 (89 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa12-3 (1.11 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa12-4 (1.23 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa12-4 (1.22 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa12-5 (1.39 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa12-5 (1.38 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa12-6 (0.89 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa12-6 (0.88 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa12-7 (0.80 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa12-7 (0.78 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa12-8 (0.57 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa12-8 (0.56 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa12 (0.55 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
EXAMPLE aa13
To a solution of compound aa7-1 (1.00 g) in CH2Cl2 (100 mL), was added trimethyloxonium tetrafluoroborate (1.09 g) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 days. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo, then water was added to the resulting residue. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc and the organic layer was washed with brine and was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to obtain compound aa13-1 (0.95 g) as a colorless amorphous solid. It was used to the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa13-1 (0.93 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa13-2 (0.28 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa13-2 (0.28 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa13-3 (0.32 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa13-3 (0.31 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa13-4 (0.27 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa13-4 (0.27 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa13-5 (0.33 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa13-5 (0.32 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa13-6 (0.28 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa13-6 (0.30 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa13-7 (0.23 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa13-7 (0.22 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa13 (45 mg) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, 7-Iodoquinoline (2.76 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa14-1 (2.50 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa14-1 (1.25 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa14-2 (1.32 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa14-2 (1.3 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa14-3 (1.4 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa14-3 (0.5 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa14-4 (0.64 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa14-4 (0.63 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa14-5 (0.59 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa14-5 (0.58 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa14-6 (0.46 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa14-6 (0.45 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa14 (0.31 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa14-3 (0.5 g) and 6-amino-3-(1,3-dioxoisoindol-2-yl)-1,2-benzisoxazole (0.61 g) were used instead of aa2-4 and tert-butyl N-(2-cyano-5-aminophenyl)methyl-N-[(2-methylpropan-2-yl)oxycarbonyl]carbamate to obtain compound 15-1 (0.42 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound aa15-1 (400 mg) in CH2Cl2-MeOH (14-14 mL), was added NH2NH2—H2O (0.32 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The precipitate was appeared. The precipitate was collected by filtration and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was suspended in CH2Cl2-MeOH, then the precipitate was collected by filtration and combined the first crops. Then the precipitate was solved in 10% HCl-MeOH then the solvent was removed in vacuo to obtain EXAMPLE aa15 (240 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
To the mixture of 5-aminoquinolin-2(1H)-one (0.1 g) in AcOH—H2O (0.73-0.3 mL), was added dropwise conc. H2SO4 (66 uL) at 0° C. Then a solution of NaNO2 (86 mg) in water (0.38 mL) was added dropwise into the reaction mixture at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 30 min, then a solution of KI (0.31 g) in water (0.25 mL) was added dropwise at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 h. Water was added to the reaction mixture and it was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water, saturated NaHCO3 aq. and brine, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. Trituration with Et2O followed by filtration gave a16-1 (0.14 g) as a brown amorphous solid. It was used to the next step without further purification.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa16-1 (1.20 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa16-2 (0.48 g) as an orange amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa16-2 (0.47 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa16-3 (0.55 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa16-3 (0.51 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa16-4 (0.38 g) as an orange amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa16-4 (0.37 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa16-5 (0.19 g) as an orange amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa16-5 (0.18 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa16-6 (0.16 g) as an orange amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa16-6 (0.15 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa16-7 (0.13 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa16-7 (0.12 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa16 (0.10 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, 6-bromo-3,4-dihydroisoquinolin-1(2H)-one (500 mg) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa17-1 (288 mg) as a yellow amorphous solid (contained diastereomer).
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa17-1 (231 mg) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa17-2 (313 g) as a white amorphous solid (contained diastereomer).
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa17-2 (270 mg) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa17-3 (254 mg) as a white amorphous solid (contained diastereomer).
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa17-3 (250 mg) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa17-4 (120 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa17-4 (98 mg) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa17-5 (83 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa17-5 (79 mg) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa17-6 (75 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa17-6 (55 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa17 (47 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, 3,4-dihydro-7-iodo-2(1H)-quinolinone (3.40 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa18-1 (0.59 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa18-1 (0.57 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa18-2 (0.59 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa18-2 (0.28 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa18-3 (0.21 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa18-3 (75 mg) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa18-4 (62 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa18-4 (52 mg) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa18-5 (47 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa18-5 (44 mg) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa18-6 (33 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa18-6 (31 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa18 (26 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 8-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa8, 3,4-dihydro-7-iodo-2(1H)-quinolinone (1.50 g) was used instead of aa7-1 to obtain compound aa19-1 (1.23 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa19-1 (1.22 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa19-2 (0.95 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa19-2 (0.60 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa19-3 (0.68 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa19-3 (0.65 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa19-4 (0.74 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa19-4 (0.56 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa19-5 (0.78 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa19-5 (0.75 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa19-6 (0.69 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa19-6 (0.67 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa19-7 (0.50 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa19-7 (0.49 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa19 (0.35 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 8-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa8, 3,4-dihydro-7-iodo-2(1H)-quinolinone (1.50 g) and cyclopropylmethyl bromide (0.80 mL) were used instead of a7-1 and MeI to obtain compound aa20-1 (1.23 g) as a pale red amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa20-1 (1.22 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa20-2 (1.16 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa20-2 (0.60 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa20-3 (0.65 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa20-3 (0.64 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa20-4 (0.70 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa20-4 (0.55 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa20-5 (0.67 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa20-5 (0.66 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa20-6 (0.62 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa20-6 (0.61 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa20-7 (0.47 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa20-7 (0.46 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa20 (0.43 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 8-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa8, 3,4-dihydro-7-iodo-2(1H)-quinolinone (2.12 g) and bromoacetic acid methyl ester (1.10 mL) were used instead of aa7-1 and MeI to obtain compound aa21-1 (2.24 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa21-1 (2.23 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa21-2 (2.27 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa21-2 (2.27 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa21-3 (2.17 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa21-3 (2.15 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa21-4 (2.11 g) as a white amorphous.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa21-4 (1.90 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa21-5 (2.44 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 10-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa10, compound aa21-5 (0.54 g) was used instead of aa10-5 to obtain compound aa21-6 (0.50 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa21-6 (0.40 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa21-7 (0.29 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa21-7 (0.28 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa21 (0.12 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 11-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa11, compound aa21-5 (1.20 g) was used instead of aa10-5 to obtain compound aa22-1 (0.99 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa22-1 (0.40 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa22-2 (0.30 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa22-2 (0.29 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa22 (0.19 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 5-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa5, aa7-4 (0.20 g) was used instead of aa3-3 to obtain compound aa23-1 (0.12 g) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa23-1 (0.18 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa23-2 (0.12 g) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 5-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa5, compound aa23-2 (0.12 g) was used instead of aa5-2 to obtain EXAMPLE aa23 (88 mg) as a beige amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa18-3 (0.50 g) and 6-amino-3-(1,3-dioxoisoindol-2-yl)-1,2-benzisoxazole (0.50 g) were used instead of aa2-4 and tert-butyl N-(2-cyano-5-aminophenyl)methyl-N-[(2-methylpropan-2-yl)oxycarbonyl]carbamate to obtain compound aa24-1 (0.40 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 15-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa15, compound aa24-1 (0.35 g) was used instead of aa15-1 to obtain EXAMPLE aa24 (0.27 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa18-3 (0.50 g), 6-amino-1-bis(tert-butoxycarbonyl)aminoisoquinoline (0.5 g), (1-cyano-2-ethoxy-2-oxoethylidenaminooxy)dimethylamino-morpholino-carbenium hexafluorophosphate (COMU: 1.18 g) and diisopropylethylamine (0.96 mL) were used instead of 2-4, N-[(5-Amino-2-cyanophenyl)methyl]-N-[(2-methylpropan-2-yl)oxycarbonyl]carbamate, WSC—HCl, and DMAP to obtain compound aa25-1 (0.49 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa25-1 (0.47 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa25-2 (0.43 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa25-2 (0.41 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain EXAMPLE aa25 (0.25 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa18-3 (0.50 g), 7-amino-4-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)aminoquinazoline (0.36 g), O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU: 1.05 g) and diisopropylethylamine (0.96 mL) were used instead of 2-4, N-[(5-amino-2-cyanophenyl)methyl]-N-[(2-methylpropan-2-yl)oxycarbonyl]carbamate, WSC—HCl, and DMAP to obtain compound aa26-1 (0.21 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa26-1 (0.21 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa26-2 (0.19 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa26-2 (0.18 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain EXAMPLE aa26 (20 mg) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, 5-bromo-3,4-dihydroquinolin-2(1H)-one (2.0 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa27-1 (0.34 g) as a white amorphous solid (contained diastereomer).
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa27-1 (0.30 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa27-2 (0.32 g) as a white amorphous solid (contained diastereomer).
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa27-2 (0.30 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa27-3 (0.24 g) as a white amorphous solid (contained diastereomer).
According to the Step 2-5 and 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa27-3 (0.24 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa27-4 (38 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa27-4 (36 mg) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa27-5 (33 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa27-5 (30 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa27 (22 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
A mixture of 2-iodophenol (6 g), 3-hydroxy-3-methylbutyl tosylate (7.4 g) and Cs2CO3 (13.3 g) in DMF (120 mL) was stirred at 0° C. for 2 h and at room temperature for 10 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with 1N HCl, saturated NaHCO3 aq., H2O, and brine, and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (Hexane/EtOAc=7/3) to obtain compound aa28-1 (8.02 g) as pale yellow oil.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa28-1 (2.20 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa28-2 (1.69 g) as a pale brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa28-2 (1.60 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa28-3 (1.72 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa28-3 (0.85 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa28-4 (0.85 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa28-4 (0.40 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa28-5 (0.33 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa28-5 (0.30 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa28-6 (87 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa28-6 (83 mg) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa28-7 (63 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa28-7 (61 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa28 (24 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 28-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa28, 3-methoxy-3-methylbutyl p-toluenesulfonate (6.50 g) was used instead of 3-hydroxy-3-methylbutyl p-toluenesulfonate to obtain compound aa29-1 (5.77 g) as colorless oil.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa29-1 (4.00 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa29-2 (2.43 g) as pale yellow oil.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa29-2 (2.42 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa29-3 (2.61 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa29-3 (2.50 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa29-4 (2.78 g) as pale brown oil.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa29-4 (1.00 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa29-5 (0.96 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa29-5 (0.70 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa29-6 (0.64 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa29-6 (0.62 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa29-7 (0.45 g) as a cream amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa29-7 (0.25 g) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa29 (0.21 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, 1-(2-iodophenyl)-2-piperidinone (2.73 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa30-1 (0.85 g) as a brown amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa30-1 (0.85 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa30-2 (0.80 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa30-2 (0.79 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa30-3 (0.58 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa30-3 (0.30 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa30-4 (0.16 g) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa30-4 (0.15 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa30-5 (0.14 g) as pale yellow oil.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa30-5 (0.14 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa30-6 (78 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa30-6 (78 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa30 (72 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 4-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa4, 2-bromo-4-fluorophenol (5.0 g) was used instead of 2-iodo-5-nitrophenol to obtain compound aa31-1 (5.25 g) as a red amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa31-1 (2.08 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa31-2 (0.75 g) as pale yellow oil.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa31-2 (0.74 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa31-3 (0.82 g) as pale yellow oil.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa31-3 (0.80 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa31-4 (0.56 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa31-4 (0.20 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa31-5 (0.19 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa31-5 (0.18 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa31-6 (0.11 g) as colorless oil.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE a2, compound aa31-6 (95 mg) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa31-7 (70 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa31-7 (70 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa31 (57 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 4-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa4, 2-hydroxy-3-nitrobenzoic acid methyl ester (18.3 g) was used instead of 2-iodo-5-nitrophenol to obtain compound aa32-1 (3.70 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 5-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa5, compound aa32-1 (3.75 g) was used instead of aa5-2 to obtain compound aa32-2 (3.17 g) as colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 16-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa16, compound aa32-2 (2.87 g) was used instead of 5-Aminoquinolin-2(1H)-one to obtain compound aa32-3 (3.99 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa32-3 (3.98 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa32-4 (1.21 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa32-4 (1.20 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa32-5 (1.32 g) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa32-5 (1.32 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa32-6 (1.16 g) as a pink amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa32-6 (0.93 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa32-7 (0.60 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 10-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa10, compound aa32-7 (0.12 g) was used instead of aa10-5 to obtain compound aa32-8 (0.11 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa32-8 (0.10 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa32-9 (70 mg) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa32-9 (70 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa32 (57 mg) as a yellow amorphous solid.
According to the Step 11-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa11, compound aa32-7 (0.30 g) was used instead of aa10-5 to obtain compound aa33-1 (0.26 g) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa33-1 (0.10 g) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa33-2 (76 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa33-2 (76 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa33 (60 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa33-1 (0.12 g), dimethylamine (2M in THF, 174 μl), and HOBt (3 mg) were used instead of 2-4, tert-butyl N-(5-amino-2-cyanophenyl)methyl-N-[(2-methylpropan-2-yl)oxycarbonyl]carbamate, and DMAP to obtain compound aa34-1 (24 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa34-1 (24 mg) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa34-2 (18 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa34-2 (18 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa34 (15 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa32-7 (0.12 g) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa35-1 (40 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid (diastereomer mixture).
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa35-1 (39 mg) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa35-2 (30 mg) as a colorless amorphous solid (diastereomer mixture).
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa35-2 (54 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa35 (49 mg) as a pale yellow amorphous solid (diastereomer mixture).
According to the Step 16-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa16, methyl 2-amino-5-trifluoromethoxybenzoate (4.0 g) was used instead of 5-Aminoquinolin-2(1H)-one to obtain compound aa36-1 (4.73 g) as pale yellow oil.
According to the Step 2-2 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa36-1 (2.35 g) was used instead of aa2-1 to obtain compound aa36-2 (0.74 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-3 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa36-2 (0.74 g) was used instead of aa2-2 to obtain compound aa36-3 (0.86 g) as colorless oil.
According to the Step 2-4 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa36-3 (0.86 g) was used instead of aa2-3 to obtain compound aa36-4 (0.74 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa36-4 (0.35 g) was used instead of aa2-4 to obtain compound aa36-5 (0.43 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-6 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa36-5 (70 mg) was used instead of aa2-5 to obtain compound aa36-6 (63 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa36-6 (59 mg) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa36-7 (45 mg) as a white solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa36-7 (43 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa36 (32 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 11-1 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa11, compound aa36-5 (0.35 g) was used instead of aa10-5 to obtain compound aa37-1 (0.33 g) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa37-1 (33 mg) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa37-2 (26 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa37-2 (24 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa37 (16 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-5 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa37-1 (88 mg), NH4Cl (33 mg), HOBt (30 mg), and diisopropylethylamine (0.11 ml) were used instead of compound aa37-1, tert-butyl N-(5-amino-2-cyanophenyl)methyl-N-[(2-methylpropan-2-yl)oxycarbonyl]carbamate, and DMAP to obtain compound aa38-1 (9.8 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-7 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa38-1 (9 mg) was used instead of aa2-6 to obtain compound aa38-2 (9 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 2-8 in synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa2, compound aa38-2 (8 mg) was used instead of aa2-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa38 (5 mg) as a white amorphous solid.
According to the Step 15-1 in the synthetic method for Example aa15, (2R)-2-acetyloxy-2-[(2R)-3-oxo-4-(2-oxo-1H-quinolin-6-yl)morpholin-2-yl]acetic acid (compound aa3-3) and 6-amino-3-(1,3-dioxoisoindol-2-yl)-1,2-benzisoxazole can be used to obtain [(1R)-2-[[3-(1,3-dioxoisoindol-2-yl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]amino]-2-oxo-1-[(2R)-3-oxo-4-(2-oxo-1H-quinolin-6-yl)morpholin-2-yl]ethyl]acetate (compound ap1-1), then further treatment can be achieved according to the Step 15-2 to obtain the title compound ap1.
According to the Step 15-1 in the synthetic method for Example aa15, (2R)-2-acetyloxy-2-[(2R)-3-oxo-4-(2-oxo-1H-quinolin-7-yl)morpholin-2-yl]acetic acid (compound aa7-4) and 6-amino-3-(1,3-dioxoisoindol-2-yl)-1,2-benzisoxazole can be used to obtain [(1R)-2-[[3-(1,3-dioxoisoindol-2-yl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]amino]-2-oxo-1-[(2R)-3-oxo-4-(2-oxo-1H-quinolin-7-yl)morpholin-2-yl]ethyl]acetate (compound ap2-1), then further treatment can be achieved according to the Step 15-2 to obtain the title compound ap2.
According to the Step 15-1 in the synthetic method for Example aa15, (2R)-2-acetyloxy-2-[(2R)-3-oxo-4-(2-oxo-1H-quinolin-5-yl)morpholin-2-yl]acetic acid (compound aa16-4) and 6-amino-3-(1,3-dioxoisoindol-2-yl)-1,2-benzisoxazole can be used to obtain [(1R)-2-[[3-(1,3-dioxoisoindol-2-yl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]amino]-2-oxo-1-[(2R)-3-oxo-4-(2-oxo-1H-quinolin-5-yl)morpholin-2-yl]ethyl]acetate (compound ap3-1), then further treatment can be achieved according to the Step 15-2 to obtain the title compound ap3.
To a solution of aa39a (150 mg, 0.65 mmol) in anhydrous DMSO (8 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added aa39b (225 mg, 0.71 mmol), potassium phosphate (275 mg, 1.30 mmol), copper (I) iodide (12 mg, 0.063 mmol) and trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (18 mg, 0.13 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 80° C. for 2 hours. Ethyl acetate (100 mL) was added and the organic layer was washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired aa39-1 (170 mg, 0.41 mmol).
To a solution of aa39-1 (170 mg, 0.41 mmol) in anhydrous dichloromethane (6 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added acetic anhydride (84 mg, 0.82 mmol), DMAP (5.0 mg, 0.041 mmol) and triethylamine (124 mg, 1.23 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Ethyl acetate (100 mL) was added and the organic layer was washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired aa39-2 (179 mg, 0.39 mmol).
To aa39-2 (179 mg, 0.39 mmol) was added a 50% solution of trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane (8 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure to afford the desired aa39-3 (0.39 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
To a solution of aa39-3 (0.39 mmol) in acetonitrile (8 mL) was added aa39c (114 mg, 0.64 mmol), EDCI (107 mg, 0.56 mmol) and DMAP (5 mg, 0.041 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hour. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired aa39-4 (208 mg, 0.37 mmol).
To aa39-4 (208 mg, 0.37 mmol) was added a solution of 7 N ammonia in methanol (8 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 40 minutes. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure to afford the desired aa39-5 (0.37 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
To a solution of aa39-5 (0.37 mmol) in a 50% solution of 1 N hydrochloric acid in methanol (5 mL) was added palladium-charcoal (10%, 200 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under a hydrogen atmosphere for 16 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered. The filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE aa39 (171 mg, 0.36 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa40a (420 mg, 1.52 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa40-1 (468 mg, 1.23 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa40-1 (468 mg, 1.23 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa40-2 (484 mg, 1.15 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa40-2 (332 mg, 0.79 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa40-3 (0.79 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa40-3 (0.79 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa40-4 (381 mg, 0.73 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa40-4 (190 mg, 0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa40-5 (93 mg, 0.19 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa40-5 (93 mg, 0.19 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa40 (65 mg, 0.15 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa41a (236 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa41-1 (81 mg, 0.19 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa41-1 (81 mg, 0.19 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa40-2 (82 mg, 0.17 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa41-2 (82 mg, 0.17 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa41-3 (0.17 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa41-3 (0.17 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa41-4 (50 mg, 0.086 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa41-4 (50 mg, 0.086 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa41-5 (0.086 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa41-5 (0.086 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa41 (21 mg, 0.042 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa42a (225 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa42-1 (92 mg, 0.22 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa42-1 (92 mg, 0.22 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa42-2 (88 mg, 0.19 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa42-2 (88 mg, 0.19 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa42-3 (0.19 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa42-3 (0.19 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa42-4 (70 mg, 0.12 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa42-4 (70 mg, 0.12 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa42-5 (0.12 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa42-5 (0.12 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa42 (28 mg, 0.058 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa42a (290 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa43-1 (243 mg, 0.60 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa43-1 (243 mg, 0.60 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa43-2 (0.60 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa43-2 (0.60 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa43-3 (0.60 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa43-3 (0.60 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa43-4 (316 mg, 0.57 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa43-4 (316 mg, 0.57 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa43-5 (0.57 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa43-5 (0.57 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa43 (237 mg, 0.51 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa44a (300 mg, 1.00 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa44-1 (129 mg, 0.32 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa44-1 (129 mg, 0.32 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa44-2 (144 mg, 0.32 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa44-2 (144 mg, 0.32 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa44-3 (0.32 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa44-3 (0.32 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa44-4 (48 mg, 0.087 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa44-4 (48 mg, 0.087 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa44-5 (0.087 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa44-5 (0.087 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa44 (33 mg, 0.071 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa45a (282 mg, 0.94 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa45-1 (186 mg, 0.46 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa45-1 (186 mg, 0.46 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa45-2 (96 mg, 0.22 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa45-2 (96 mg, 0.22 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa45-3 (0.22 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa45-3 (0.22 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa45-4 (117 mg, 0.21 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa45-4 (117 mg, 0.21 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa45-5 (0.21 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa45-5 (0.21 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa45 (48 mg, 0.10 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa46a (500 mg, 1.83 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa46-1 (380 mg, 1.01 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa46-1 (380 mg, 1.01 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa46-2 (1.01 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa46-2 (222 mg, 0.53 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa46-3 (0.53 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa46-3 (0.53 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa46-4 (155 mg, 0.30 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa46-4 (155 mg, 0.30 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa46-5 (0.30 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa46-5 (0.30 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa46 (59 mg, 0.14 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa47a (300 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa47-1 (338 mg, 0.81 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa47-1 (338 mg, 0.81 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa47-2 (146 mg, 0.32 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa47-2 (146 mg, 0.32 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa47-3 (0.32 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa47-3 (0.32 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa47-4 (163 mg, 0.29 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa47-4 (163 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa47-5 (0.29 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa47-5 (0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa47 (115 mg, 0.24 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa48a (205 mg, 0.68 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa48-1 (222 mg, 0.55 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa48-1 (222 mg, 0.55 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa48-2 (219 mg, 0.49 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa48-2 (219 mg, 0.49 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa48-3 (0.49 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa48-3 (0.49 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa48-4 (182 mg, 0.33 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa48-4 (182 mg, 0.33 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa48-5 (0.33 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa48-5 (0.33 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa48 (118 mg, 0.25 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa49a (315 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa49-1 (177 mg, 0.41 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa49-1 (177 mg, 0.41 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa49-2 (160 mg, 0.34 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa49-2 (160 mg, 0.34 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa49-3 (0.34 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa49-3 (0.34 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa49-4 (90 mg, 0.16 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa49-4 (90 mg, 0.16 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa49-5 (0.16 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa49-5 (0.16 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa49 (60 mg, 0.12 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa53a (225 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa53-1 (222 mg, 0.53 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa53-1 (222 mg, 0.53 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa53-2 (207 mg, 0.45 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa53-2 (207 mg, 0.45 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa53-3 (0.45 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa53-3 (106 mg, 0.26 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa53-4 (147 mg, 0.26 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa53-4 (147 mg, 0.26 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa53-5 (0.26 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa53-5 (0.26 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa53 (83 mg, 0.17 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa54a (225 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa54-1 (222 mg, 0.53 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa54-1 (222 mg, 0.53 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa54-2 (207 mg, 0.45 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa54-2 (207 mg, 0.45 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa54-3 (0.45 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa53-3 (109 mg, 0.27 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 and compound aa54b (140 mg, 0.40 mmol) was instead of compound aa39c to obtain compound aa54-4 (116 mg, 0.16 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa54-4 (116 mg, 0.16 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa54-5 (0.16 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
To a solution of compound aa54-5 (0.16 mmol) was added a 4 N solution of hydrogen chloride in dioxane (10 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. Anhydrous ethanol (12 mL) was added and the reaction mixture was heated under reflux for 16 hours. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE aa54 (55 mg, 0.11 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa50a (1.24 g, 3.03 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa50-1 (1.16 g, 2.27 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa50-1 (1.16 g, 2.27 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa50-2 (1.16 g, 2.09 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa50-2 (250 mg, 0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa50-3 (0.50 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa50-3 (0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa50-4 (255 mg, 0.31 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa50-4 (255 mg, 0.31 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa40-5 (0.31 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa50-5 (0.31 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain compound aa50-6 (0.31 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
To a solution of compound aa50-6 (0.31 mmol) in methanol (2 mL) and water (2 mL) was added triethylamine (0.43 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE aa50 (153 mg, 0.31 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound aa50 (90 mg, 0.18 mmol) in methanol (4 mL) was added 1 N hydrochloric acid (1 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 days. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE aa51 (48 mg, 0.094 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa58a (616 mg, 1.42 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39B to obtain compound aa58-1 (710 mg, 1.32 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa58-1 (710 mg, 1.32 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa58-2 (707 mg, 1.22 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa58-2 (0.66 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa58-3 (0.66 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa58-3 (0.66 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa58-4 (445 mg, 0.65 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa58-4 (445 mg, 0.65 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa58-5 (0.65 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa58-5 (0.65 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa58 (42 mg, 0.083 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 51-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa51, compound aa58 (24 mg, 0.047 mmol) was used instead of compound aa50 to obtain EXAMPLE aa52 (24 mg, 0.046 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa56a (886 mg, 2.38 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa56-1 (669 mg, 1.41 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa56-1 (669 mg, 1.41 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa56-2 (477 mg, 0.92 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa56-2 (477 mg, 0.92 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa40-3 (0.92 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa40-3 (235 mg, 0.51 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa56-4 (244 mg, 0.39 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa56-4 (244 mg, 0.39 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa56-5 (0.39 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa56-5 (0.39 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa56 (160 mg, 0.30 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa56a (886 mg, 2.38 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa59-1 (669 mg, 1.41 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa59-1 (669 mg, 1.41 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa59-2 (477 mg, 0.92 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa59-2 (477 mg, 0.92 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa59-3 (0.92 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa54b (235 mg, 0.51 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa59-4 (224 mg, 0.28 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa59-4 (224 mg, 0.28 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa59-5 (0.28 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa59-5 (0.28 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa59 (57 mg, 0.10 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa60a (315 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa60-1 (218 mg, 0.50 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa60-1 (218 mg, 0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa60-2 (226 mg, 0.47 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa60-2 (226 mg, 0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa60-3 (0.47 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa60-3 (100 mg, 0.24 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa60-4 (87 mg, 0.15 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa60-4 (87 mg, 0.15 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa60-5 (0.15 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa60-5 (0.15 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa60 (71 mg, 0.14 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa60a (315 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa61-1 (218 mg, 0.50 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa61-1 (218 mg, 0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa61-2 (226 mg, 0.47 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa61-2 (226 mg, 0.47 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa61-3 (0.47 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa61-3 (124 mg, 0.30 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa61-4 (118 mg, 0.16 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa61-4 (118 mg, 0.16 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa61-5 (0.16 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa61-5 (0.16 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa61 (71 mg, 0.14 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa63a (158 mg, 0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa63-1 (124 mg, 0.29 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa63-1 (124 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa63-2 (132 mg, 0.28 mmol).
According to Step 39-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa63-2 (132 mg, 0.28 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa63-3 (0.28 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa63-3 (0.28 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa63-4 (88 mg, 0.12 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa63-4 (88 mg, 0.12 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound 63-5 (0.12 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa63-5 (0.12 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa63 (26 mg, 0.051 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa64a (158 mg, 0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa64-1 (125 mg, 0.29 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa64-1 (125 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa64-2 (136 mg, 0.29 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa64-2 (136 mg, 0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa64-3 (0.29 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa64-3 (0.29 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa64-4 (109 mg, 0.15 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa64-4 (109 mg, 0.15 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa64-5 (0.15 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa64-5 (0.15 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa64 (70 mg, 0.14 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa66a (334 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39B to obtain compound aa66-1 (276 mg, 0.61 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa66-1 (276 mg, 0.61 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa66-2 (0.61 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa66-2 (0.61 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa66-3 (0.61 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa66-3 (213 mg, 0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa66-4 (310 mg, 0.40 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa66-4 (310 mg, 0.40 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa66-5 (0.40 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa66-5 (0.40 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa66 (208 mg, 0.39 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa68a (923 mg, 2.38 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa68-1 (701 mg, 1.43 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa68-1 (485 mg, 0.99 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa68-2 (477 mg, 0.89 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa68-2 (477 mg, 0.89 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa68-3 (0.89 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa68-3 (0.89 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa68-4 (536 mg, 0.67 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa68-4 (536 mg, 0.67 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa68-5 (0.67 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa68-5 (0.67 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa68 (291 mg, 0.36 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa55a (616 mg, 1.42 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa55-1 (710 mg, 1.32 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa55-1 (710 mg, 1.32 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa55-2 (707 mg, 1.22 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa55-2 (707 mg, 1.22 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa55-3 (1.22 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa55-3 (1.22 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa55-4 (409 mg, 0.48 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa55-4 (409 mg, 0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa55-5 (0.48 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa55-5 (0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain compound aa55-6 (0.48 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 50-7s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa50, compound aa55-6 (0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound aa50-6 to obtain EXAMPLE aa55 (80 mg, 0.15 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 50-7s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa50, compound aa55-6 (0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound aa50-6 to obtain EXAMPLE aa57 (31 mg, 0.058 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa65a (636 mg, 1.81 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa65-1 (694 mg, 1.53 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa65-1 (694 mg, 1.53 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa65-2 (723 mg, 1.45 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa65-2 (723 mg, 1.45 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa65-3 (1.45 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa65-3 (1.45 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa65-4 (715 mg, 0.93 mmol).
According to Step 39-55 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa65-4 (715 mg, 0.93 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa65-5 (0.93 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa65-5 (0.93 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa65 (261 mg, 0.56 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa65-5 (715 mg, 0.93 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain aa67-1 (64 mg, 0.12 mmol).
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa67-1 (64 mg, 0.12 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa67 (30 mg, 0.068 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa50-5 (276 mg, 0.35 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa62 (65 mg, 0.12 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa70a (559 mg, 1.47 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa70-1 (524 mg, 1.08 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa70-1 (524 mg, 1.08 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa70-2 (558 mg, 1.06 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa70-2 (558 mg, 1.06 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa70-3 (1.06 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa70-3 (1.06 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa70-4 (415 mg, 0.54 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa70-4 (415 mg, 0.54 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa70-5 (0.54 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa70-5 (0.54 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain aa70-6 (0.54 mmol).
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa70-6 (0.54 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa70 (83 mg, 0.18 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa69a (296 mg, 0.93 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa69-1 (345 mg, 0.82 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa69-1 (345 mg, 0.82 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa69-2 (372 mg, 0.81 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa69-2 (372 mg, 0.81 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa69-3 (0.81 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa69-3 (0.81 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa69-4 (523 mg, 0.71 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa69-4 (523 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa69-5 (0.71 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa69-5 (0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa69 (274 mg, 0.56 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa71a (923 mg, 2.38 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa71-1 (701 mg, 1.43 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa71-1 (485 mg, 0.99 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa71-2 (477 mg, 0.89 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa71-2 (477 mg, 0.89 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa71-3 (0.89 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa71-3 (345 mg, 0.85 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa71-4 (523 mg, 0.71 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa71-4 (523 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa71-5 (0.71 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa71-5 (0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa71 (274 mg, 0.56 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa72a (356 mg, 1.03 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa72-1 (358 mg, 0.80 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa72-1 (358 mg, 0.80 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa72-2 (391 mg, 0.80 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa72-2 (391 mg, 0.80 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa72-3 (0.80 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa72-3 (0.80 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa72-4 (534 mg, 0.70 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa72-4 (534 mg, 0.70 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa72-5 (0.70 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa72-5 (0.70 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa72 (283 mg, 0.56 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa73a (724 mg, 2.10 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa73-1 (331 mg, 0.74 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa73-1 (331 mg, 0.74 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa73-2 (359 mg, 0.73 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa73-2 (359 mg, 0.73 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa73-3 (0.73 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa73-3 (0.73 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa73-4 (395 mg, 0.52 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa73-4 (395 mg, 0.52 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa73-5 (0.52 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa73-5 (0.52 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa73 (222 mg, 0.43 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound aa70 (44 mg, 0.094 mmol) in methanol (4 mL) was concentrated sulfuric acid (0.08 mL). The reaction mixture was heated at 80° C. for 16 hours. Triethylamine (0.5 mL) was added. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE aa74 (20 mg, 0.042 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound aa65 (237 mg, 0.51 mmol) in methanol (5 mL) and water (5 mL) was added triethylamine (0.5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 days. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in methanol (5 mL) and concentrated sulfuric acid (0.1 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was heated at 80° C. for 16 hours. Triethylamine (1 mL) was added. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE aa75 (20 mg, 0.042 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa76a (328 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa76-1 (347 mg, 0.71 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa76-1 (347 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa76-2 (265 mg, 0.54 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa76-2 (265 mg, 0.54 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa76-3 (0.54 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa76-3 (0.54 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa76-4 (282 mg, 0.37 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa76-4 (282 mg, 0.37 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa76-5 (0.37 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa76-5 (0.37 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa76 (135 mg, 0.26 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
To a solution of compound aa70 (55 mg, 0.12 mmol) in absolute ethanol (4 mL) was added concentrated sulfuric acid (0.05 mL). The reaction mixture was heated at 80° C. for 16 hours. Triethylamine (0.5 mL) was added. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE aa77 (24 mg, 0.049 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa78a (1.59 g, 3.51 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa78-1 (895 mg, 1.61 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa78-1 (895 mg, 1.61 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa78-2 (854 mg, 1.43 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa78-2 (854 mg, 1.43 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa78-3 (1.43 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa78-3 (1.43 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa78-4 (968 mg, 1.38 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa78-4 (968 mg, 1.38 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa78-5 (1.38 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa78-5 (1.38 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa78 (542 mg, 1.03 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa79a (341 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa79-1 (214 mg, 0.46 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa79-1 (214 mg, 0.46 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa79-2 (207 mg, 0.41 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa79-2 (207 mg, 0.41 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa79-3 (0.41 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa79-3 (0.41 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa79-4 (277 mg, 0.36 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa79-4 (277 mg, 0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa79-5 (0.36 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa79-5 (0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa79 (147 mg, 0.28 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa77, compound aa78 (60 mg, 0.11 mmol) was used instead of compound aa70 to obtain EXAMPLE aa80 (29 mg, 0.049 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa78-4 (968 mg, 1.38 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa81-1 which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa81-1 was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa81 (50 mg, 0.092 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa82a (275 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa82-1 (304 mg, 0.78 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa82-1 (304 mg, 0.78 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa82-2 (302 mg, 0.70 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa82-2 (302 mg, 0.70 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa82-3 (0.70 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa82-3 (104 mg, 0.28 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa82-4 (143 mg, 0.20 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa82-4 (143 mg, 0.20 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa82-5 (0.20 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa82-5 (0.20 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa82 (61 mg, 0.13 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa83a (616 mg, 1.37 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa83-1 (592 mg, 1.07 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa83-1 (592 mg, 1.07 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa83-2 (608 mg, 1.02 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa83-2 (608 mg, 1.02 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa83-3 (1.02 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa83-3 (1.02 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa83-4 (612 mg, 0.71 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa83-4 (612 mg, 0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa83-5 (0.71 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa83-5 (0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain compound aa83-6 (0.71 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa83-6 (0.71 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa83 (124 mg, 0.23 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa77, compound aa83 (90 mg, 0.17 mmol) was used instead of compound aa70 to obtain EXAMPLE aa84 (92 mg, 0.16 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa50-3 (250 mg, 0.50 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 and compound aa85a (105 mg, 0.60 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39c to obtain compound aa85-1 (254 mg, 0.39 mmol).
To a solution of aa85-1 (254 mg, 0.39 mmol) in methanol (8 mL) was added palladium-charcoal (10%, 26 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under a hydrogen atmosphere for 16 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered. The filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure to obtain compound aa85-2 (0.39 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
To compound aa85-2 (0.39 mmol) was added a 7 N solution of ammonia in methanol (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 days. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by high pH RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE aa85 (4 mg, 0.0073 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa82-3 (175 mg, 0.46 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 and compound aa86a (100 mg, 0.70 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39c to obtain compound aa86-1 (81 mg, 0.16 mmol).
To compound aa86-1 (81 mg, 0.16 mmol) was added a 7 N solution of ammonia in methanol (10 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 days. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by high pH RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE aa86 (45 mg, 0.094 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa59-3 (179 mg, 0.44 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 and compound aa87a (117 mg, 0.66 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39c to obtain compound aa87-1 (163 mg, 0.29 mmol).
To compound aa87-1 (163 mg, 0.29 mmol) was added a 7 N solution of ammonia in methanol (20 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 days. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure to afford the desired EXAMPLE aa87 (144 mg, 0.29 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa88a (760 mg, 1.78 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa88-1 (618 mg, 1.17 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa88-1 (618 mg, 1.17 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa88-2 (550 mg, 0.99 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa88-2 (550 mg, 0.99 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa88-3 (0.99 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa88-3 (0.99 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa88-4 (649 mg, 0.96 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa88-4 (649 mg, 0.96 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa88-5 (0.96 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa88-5 (0.96 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa88 (156 mg, 0.31 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 77-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa77, compound aa88 (150 mg, 0.30 mmol) was used instead of compound aa70 to obtain EXAMPLE aa89 (136 mg, 0.28 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa90a (293 mg, 0.80 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa90-1 (347 mg, 0.74 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa90-1 (347 mg, 0.74 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa90-2 (282 mg, 0.55 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa90-2 (282 mg, 0.55 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa90-3 (0.55 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa90-3 (0.55 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-3 to obtain compound aa90-4 (219 mg, 0.36 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa90-4 (219 mg, 0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa90-5 (0.36 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 39-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa90-5 (0.36 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa90 (156 mg, 0.30 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
According to Step 86-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa86, compound aa79-3 (176 mg, 0.35 mmol) was used instead of compound aa82-3 to obtain compound aa91-1 (50 mg, 0.079 mmol).
According to Step 86-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa86, compound aa91-1 (50 mg, 0.079 mmol) was used instead of compound aa86-1 to obtain EXAMPLE aa91 (29 mg, 0.048 mmol).
According to Step 39-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa92a (330 mg, 0.95 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39b to obtain compound aa92-1 (223 mg, 0.45 mmol).
According to Step 39-2s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa92-1 (223 mg, 0.45 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-1 to obtain compound aa92-2 (234 mg, 0.48 mmol).
According to Step 39-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa92-2 (210 mg, 0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-2 to obtain compound aa92-3 (0.48 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-4s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa92-3 (0.48 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-3 to obtain compound aa92-4 (292 mg, 0.38 mmol).
According to Step 39-5s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa39, compound aa92-4 (292 mg, 0.38 mmol) was used instead of compound aa39-4 to obtain compound aa92-5 (0.38 mmol) which was used in the next step without further purification.
According to Step 54-6s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa54, compound aa92-5 (0.38 mmol) was used instead of compound aa54-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa92 (160 mg, 0.0.31 mmol) as a white amorphous solid.
To a solution of imidazole (258 mg, 3.79 mmol) in anhydrous DCM (4 mL) cooled at −10° C. was added thionyl chloride (113 mg, 0.95 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 10 minutes and was added to a solution of compound 93b (304 mg, 1.89 mmol) in anhydrous DCM (3 mL) cooled at −40° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The reaction mixture was filtered. The filtrate was added to a solution of compound aa93a (100 mg, 0.38 mmol) and 1,2,4-triazole (39 mg, 0.57 mmol) in anhydrous DCM (3 mL) cooled at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. Ethyl acetate (100 mL) was added and the organic layer was washed with 2 N hydrochloric acid, saturated sodium bicarbonate solution and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography to afford the desired aa93-1 (15 mg, 0.037 mmol).
To a solution of aa93-1 (5 mg, 0.012 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane was added a 1 N sodium hydroxide solution (0.1 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. Ethyl acetate (50 mL) was added and the organic layer was washed with 1 N hydrochloric acid, water and brine. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure to afford the desired aa93-2 (0.012 mmol). The crude product was used in the next step without further purification.
Acetyl chloride (3 mL) was added to absolute ethanol (1 mL) cooled at 0° C. to generate a hydrogen chloride solution. To the hydrogen chloride solution was added a solution of aa93-2 (0.012 mmol) in absolute ethanol (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 days. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. To the residue was added a 7 N solution of ammonia in methanol (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The organic solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by RP-HPLC to afford the desired EXAMPLE aa93 (1 mg, 0.0023 mmol).
According to Step 93-1s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa93, compound aa94a (606 mg, 3.08 mmol) was used instead of compound aa93b to obtain compound aa94-1 (86 mg, 0.19 mmol).
To compound aa94-1 (86 mg, 0.19 mmol) was added saturated ammonium hydroxide solution (8 mL). The reaction mixture was heated under reflux for 2 days. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by RP-HPLC to afford the desired compound aa94-2 (8.5 mg, 0.020 mmol).
According to Step 93-3s in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa93, compound aa94-2 (8.5 mg, 0.020 mmol) was used instead of compound aa93-2 to obtain EXAMPLE aa94 (7.2 mg, 0.016 mmol).
4-amino-2-fluorobenzonitrile (10 g, 0.0735 mol) was dissolved in THF (50 ml), NaH (2.94 g of a 60% dispersion, 1 eq) was added. After 30 minutes the resulting mixture was added to a mixture of Boc2O (16 g, 1 eq) and DMAP (0.897 g, 10%) in THF (100 ml). This mixture was stirred for 2 hours and was diluted with EtOAc. The mixture was washed with NH4Cl(sat), dried (MgSO4) and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-60% EtOAc in hexane) to give, in order of elution, 7.7 g (31%) of M-1-1b and 4.4 g (25%) of M1-1a.
Compound M1-1a or M1-1b (0.0229 mol) was dissolved in 10:1 DMF/H2O (114 ml). Acetohydroxamic acid (10.3 g, 6 eq) and K2CO3 (38 g, 12 eq) were added and the mixture heated at 55° C. overnight. After cooling to room temperature the mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with NH4Cl(sat) and dried (MgSO4). The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-70% EtOAc in hexane) to give 5 g (87%) of M1-2.
Compound M1-2 (5.3 g, 0.0213 mol) was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (106 ml) and cooled to 0° C. o-phthaloyl dichloride (3.7 ml, 1.2 eq) was added followed by Et3N (7.18 ml, 2.4 eq). The mixture was stirred overnight. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with NH4Cl(sat) and dried (MgSO4). The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-100% EtOAc in hexane) to give 5.6 g of M1-3.
Compound M1-3 (1.37 g, 0.00363 mol) was dissolved in 1,4-dioxane (18 ml), 4N HCl in 1,4-dioxane (18 ml) was added and the mixture stirred overnight. The mixture was concentrated and the residue suspended in EtOAc. NaHCO3(sat) was added and stirred until a clear organic layer persisted. The organic layer was dried (MgSO4), and concentrated to give 1 g of M1-4 (98%).
2-Fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid (2 g, 0.0088 mol) was dissolved in MeCN (44 ml) and the mixture cooled to 0° C. Morpholine (0.929 ml, 1.2 eq) followed by EDCI.HCl (2.03 g, 1.2 eq) and DMAP (108 mg, 0.1 eq) were added and the mixture stirred overnight. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with NH4Cl(sat), dried (MgSO4), and concentrated. The resulting residue was then purified by silica gel chromatography (0-30% EtOAc in hexane) gave 2 g of M1-5. LCMS MH+=336.
Compound M1-5a (1.37 g, 0.0059 mol) and compound M1-1 (1.99 g, 1 eq) were dissolved in 1,4-dioxane (60 ml), to this mixture were added CuI (339 mg, 0.2 eq), Cs2CO3 (3.87 g, 2 eq), and trans-N,N-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (0.281 ml, 0.3 eq). The resulting solution was degassed and heated at 90° C. for 6.5 hours. The mixture was cooled to rt, NH4Cl(sat) was added and the mixture extracted with EtOAc. The extracts were washed with NH4Cl(sat), dried (MgSO4), and concentrated. The resulting residue was then purified by silica gel chromatography (0-100% EtOAc in hexane) gave 1.6 g of M1-6.
M1-6 (1.6 g, 0.00365 mol) was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (18.25 ml) and cooled to 0° C., Ac2O (0.69 ml, 2 eq), pyridine (0.59 ml, 2 eq), and DMAP (45 mg, 0.1 eq) was added. The mixture was stirred for 1 hours, diluted with EtOAc, washed with CuSO4 solution, water, dried, and concentrated to give 1.75 g of M1-7.
M1-7 (1.75 g, 0.00364 mol) was dissolved in 1:1 CH2Cl2/TFA (40 ml) and stirred for 30 minutes. The mixture was concentrated to give 1.6 g of M1-8.
Compound M1-8 (1 g, 0.00235 mol) and compound M1-4 (724 mg, 1.1 eq) were dissolved in MeCN (4.71 ml, 0.5M) and the mixture cooled to 0° C. EDCI.HCl (0.542 g, 1.1 eq) and DMAP (29 mg, 10%) were added and the mixture stirred overnight. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with NH4Cl(sat), dried (MgSO4), and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to give 1 g (63%) of M1-9.
Compound M1-9 (1 g, 0.00146 mol) was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of CH2Cl2/MeOH (58 ml), NH2NH2 (0.458 ml, 10 eq) was added and the mixture stirred for 2 hours. The mixture was concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to give 0.5 g (67%) of Example aa95.
M2-1 was synthesized using the procedure described in WO 2008/077009, page 39, example 27, steps (a) to (b).
M2-1 (0.875 g, 0.0033 mol) was dissolved in DCE (8.2 ml), morpholine (0.373 ml, 1.3 eq) and AcOH (0.94 ml, 5 eq) were added and the mixture stirred for 30 minutes. Na(OAc)3BH (1.392 g, 2 eq) was added and the mixture stirred overnight. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with NaHCO3(sat), dried (MgSO4), and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in ether and acidified with 1M HCl in ether. The resulting precipitate was collected, suspended in EtOAc, and neutralized with NaHCO3(sat). The organic layer was dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to give 305 mg of M2-2.
Compound M2-2a (0.23 g, 0.001 mol) and compound M2-2 (0.305 g, 1 eq) were dissolved in DMSO (10 ml), to this mixture were added CuI (57 mg, 0.2 eq), K3PO4 (422 mg, 2 eq), and trans-N,N-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (0.047 ml, 0.3 eq). The resulting solution was degassed and heated at 90° C. for 1.5 hours. The mixture was cooled to rt, NH4Cl(sat) was added and the mixture extracted with EtOAc. The extracts were washed with NH4Cl(sat), dried (MgSO4), and concentrated. The resulting residue was then purified by silica gel chromatography (0-100% EtOAc in hexane) gave 266 mg of M2-3.
Compound M2-4 was synthesized using a procedure similar to the synthesis of compound M1-7.
M2-4 (230 mg, 0.000476) was treated with 4M HCl in dioxane for 16 hours. The mixture was then concentrated to give M2-5 as a hydrochloride salt.
M2-5.HCl (100 mg, 0.000216) and M1-4 (66 mg, 1.1 eq) were dissolved in MeCN and cooled to 0° C. DMAP (3 mg, 0.1 eq), pyridine (0.017 ml, 1 eq), and EDCI.HCl (50 mg, 1.2 eq) were added and the mixture stirred for 2 hours. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with NH4Cl(sat), dried (MgSO4), and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to give 40 mg of M2-6.
Example aa96 was synthesized using a procedure similar to the synthesis of compound aa95. Additionally an ether solution of aa96 was converted to the hydrochloride salt by treatment with 1M HCl in ether and isolated by filtration.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-((R)-4-(4-chloro-3-((4,4-difluoropiperidin-1-yl)methyl)phenyl)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)-2-hydroxyacetamide (Example aa97) was synthesized in a similar manner to example aa96 using previously described procedures.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-hydroxy-2-((R)-3-oxo-4-(3-(3-oxomorpholino)phenyl)morpholin-2-yl)acetamide (Example aa98) was synthesized in a similar manner to example aa95 using previously described procedures.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-((R)-4-(2-(difluoromethoxy)phenyl)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)-2-hydroxyacetamide (Example aa99) was synthesized in a similar manner to example aa95 using previously described procedures.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-hydroxy-2-((R)-4-(2-isopropoxyphenyl)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)acetamide (Example aa100) was synthesized in a similar manner to example aa95 using previously described procedures.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-((R)-4-(3-cyanophenyl)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)-2-hydroxyacetamide (Example aa101) was synthesized in a similar manner to example aa95 using previously described procedures.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-hydroxy-2-((R)-4-(3-(morpholine-4-carbonyl)phenyl)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)acetamide (Example aa102) was synthesized in a similar manner to example aa95 using previously described procedures.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-((R)-4-(4-chloro-3-(morpholine-4-carbonyl)phenyl)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)-2-hydroxyacetamide (Example aa103) was synthesized in a similar manner to example aa95 using previously described procedures.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-hydroxy-2-((R)-4-(4-methyl-3-(morpholine-4-carbonyl)phenyl)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)acetamide (Example aa104) was synthesized in a similar manner to example aa95 using previously described procedures.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-hydroxy-2-((R)-3-oxo-4-(3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)morpholin-2-yl)acetamide (Example aa105) was synthesized in a similar manner to example aa95 using previously described procedures.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-hydroxy-2-((R)-3-oxo-4-(3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)morpholin-2-yl)acetamide (Example aa106) was synthesized in a similar manner to example aa95 using previously described procedures.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-((R)-4-(4-chloro-3-(1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline-2-carbonyl)phenyl)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)-2-hydroxyacetamide (Example aa107) was synthesized in a similar manner to example aa95 using previously described procedures.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-((R)-4-(4-chloro-3-(4,4-difluoropiperidine-1-carbonyl)phenyl)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)-2-hydroxyacetamide (Example aa108) was synthesized in a similar manner to example a95 using previously described procedures.
(R)—N-(3-aminobenzo[d]isoxazol-6-yl)-2-((R)-4-(3-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)-2-hydroxyacetamide (Example aa109) was synthesized in a similar manner to example a95 using previously described procedures.
4-cyano-3-fluoroaniline (10 g, 0.073 mol) dissolved in EtOH (36 ml). Water (7.3 ml) was added followed by Na2CO3 (5.06 g, 0.65 eq) and the temperature of the mixture raised to 60° C. NH2OH.HCl (5.6 g, 1.1 eq) in water (7.3 ml) was added slowly, and the mixture heated at 60° C. overnight. The mixture was cooled to rt, the solid was collected by filtration, washed with, water (7 ml), EtOH (7 ml), ether (20 ml), and dried to give 7.5 g of M16-1.
M16-1 (7.5 g, 0.044 mol) was suspended in EtOH (26 ml), diethyl carbonate (5.34 ml, 1 eq) was added and the mixture warmed to 65° C. NaOEt (16.5 g of a 21% wt solution in EtOH, 1.15 eq) added slowly and the temperature of the mixture raised to 70° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was cooled to rt, concentrated and dissolved in water (25 ml) at 70° C., HCl(c) added to bring the PH to 2, the mixture was cooled to 0° C. The solid was collected by filtration and washed with water (20 ml), EtOH (7 ml), and ether (20 ml) to give 6.4 g of M16-2.
m-Iodobenzoic acid (1 g, 0.004 mol) was dissolved in MeCN (20 ml), Cs2CO3 (2.63 g, 2 eq) and benzyl bromide (0.528 ml, 1.1 eq) added. The mixture was heated at reflux overnight. The mixture was concentrated, taken up in EtOAc, washed with water, dried (MgSO4), and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-60% EtOAc in hexane) to give 1.6 g of M16-3.
Compound M16-3 was converted to compound M16-7 using previously described procedures.
Compound M16-7 (200 mg, 0.00033 mol) was dissolved in MeOH (5.5 ml), 7N NH3 (0.284 ml, 6 eq) was added, and the mixture stirred for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated, taken up in MeOH (5 ml). 1M HCl (0.662 ml, 2 eq) was added followed by 10% Pd(C) (100 mg). The mixture was put under H2 (1 atm) for 1 hour. The solids were removed by filtration, the mixture was concentrated. The residue was triturated with ether/MeOH, and solid collected to give 143 mg of Example aa110.
(R)—N-(4-carbamimidoyl-3,5-difluorophenyl)-2-hydroxy-2-((R)-3-oxo-4-(3-(3-oxomorpholino)phenyl)morpholin-2-yl)acetamide (Example aa111) was synthesized in a similar manner to previously described examples.
(R)—N-(4-carbamimidoyl-2,3-difluorophenyl)-2-hydroxy-2-((R)-3-oxo-4-(3-(3-oxomorpholino)phenyl)morpholin-2-yl)acetamide (Example aa112) was synthesized in a similar manner to previously described examples.
(R)—N-(4-carbamimidoyl-2,5-difluorophenyl)-2-hydroxy-2-((R)-3-oxo-4-(3-(3-oxomorpholino)phenyl)morpholin-2-yl)acetamide (Example aa113) was synthesized in a similar manner to previously described examples.
(R)—N-(4-carbamimidoyl-3-fluorophenyl)-2-hydroxy-2-((R)-3-oxo-4-(3-(3-oxomorpholino)phenyl)morpholin-2-yl)acetamide (Example aa114) as synthesized in a similar manner to previously described examples.
3-methyl-5-(trifluoromethyl)aniline (4.84 g, 0.011 mol) was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and cooled to 0° C. NBS (4.92 g, 1 eq) was added and the mixture stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was loaded onto silica gel and eluted with 0-20% EtOAc in hexane to give 2.3 g of M21-1.
M21-1 (2.3 g, 0.009053 mol) was dissolved in NMP (45 ml). Pd(Ph3P)4 (0.937 mg, 0.1 eq), Zn(CN)2 (1.27 g, 1.2 eq), and Zn powder (0.592 g, 1 eq) were added. The mixture was degassed and heated at 110° C. overnight. After cooling to rt the mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 solution. The extracts were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-30% EtOAc in hexane) to give 1.5 g of M21-2
M21-2 (1.5 g, 0.00614 mol), was dissolved in AcOH (30 ml), phthalic anhydride (1 g, 1.1 eq) was added and the mixture heated at 130° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was cooled to rt and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-30% EtOAc in hexane) to give 2.0 g of M21-3.
M21-3 (2.6 g, 0.0078 mol) was dissolved in CCl4 (39 ml), AIBN (0.259 g, 0.2 eq) and NBS (1.822 g, 1.3 eq) was added and the mixture heated at reflux while being irradiated with a 250 W lamp for 2 days. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-30% EtOAc in hexane) to give 2.15 g of M21-4.
M21-4 (2.15 g, 0.00525 mol) was dissolved in DMF (52 ml), K2CO3 (1.45 g, 2 eq) and (Boc)2NH (2.28 g, 2 eq) was added and the mixture stirred overnight. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with NH4Cl(sat). The organic layers were dried (MgSO4) concentrated and the residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-30% EtOAc in hexane) to give 1.4 g of M21-5.
M21-5 (1.4 g, 0.00257) was dissolved in 1:1 MeOH/CH2Cl2 (25 ml) and cooled to 0° C. Hydrazine (1.6 ml, 20 eq) was added, after 15 minutes the mixture was allowed to warm to rt and then stirred for an additional 1.5 hours. The resulting suspension was filtered and the filtrate purified by silica gel chromatography (0-40% EtOAc in hexane) to give 0.583 g of M21-6.
M21-6 (0.538 g, 0.0013 mol) and M21-x (disclosed previously in this filing) (0.661 g, 1.3 eq) were dissolved in MeCN (2.6 ml) and cooled to 0° C. EDCI.HCl (0.372 g, 1.5 eq) and DMAP (16 mg, 0.1 eq) were added and the mixture stirred overnight. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with NH4Cl(sat), the extracts were dried (MgSO4), and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-100% EtOAc in hexane) to give 167 mg of M21-7.
M21-7 (167 mg, 0.00021 mol) was treated with 7N NH3 in MeOH for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (0-5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to give 60 mg of M21-8.
Compound M21-8 (60 mg) was treated with 4M HCl in dioxane for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated to give 60 mg of (R)—N-(3-(aminomethyl)-4-cyano-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-2-hydroxy-2-((R)-3-oxo-4-(3-(3-oxomorpholino)phenyl)morpholin-2-yl)acetamide (Example aa115).
Example aa115 (5 mg) was dissolved in EtOH and heated at 90° C. for 2 hours. After cooling to rt the mixture was concentrated to give 4 mg of (R)-2-hydroxy-N-(1-imino-7-(trifluoromethyl)isoindolin-5-yl)-2-((R)-3-oxo-4-(3-(3-oxomorpholino)phenyl)morpholin-2-yl)acetamide (example aa116).
To a round bottom flask charged with a stir bar was added morpholinone (0.15 g) AMRI 1-1 and 3-trifluoromethoxyiodobenzene (0.12 mL) in dioxane (4 mL) at rt was added Cs2CO3 (0.42 g), and CuI (37 mg) under Nz. trans-N,N′-Dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (31 L) was added dropwise and the mixture was affixed with a condenser. The mixture was degassed under vacuum (˜20 mm), filled with N2, and heated to 90° C. The mixture stirred for 3 h at 90° C., cooled to rt, and was diluted with conc NH4OH and water, EtOAc. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc three times and the organic layers were combined. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford a yellow oil. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a 95% CH2Cl2/5% MeOH mixture to afford MD1-1 (0.21 g) as a white solid.
To a solution of MD 1-1 (0.21 g) in CH2Cl2 (2.5 ml) at 0° C. was added pyridine (63 μL), Ac2O (74 μA), and DMAP (5 mg). The mixture was stirred for 1 hour at 0° C., warmed to rt, and stirred for an additional 12 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and the organic layer was washed sequentially with sat. aq. CuSO4 solution, water, and brine. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford MD 1-2 (0.22 g) as a light yellow semisolid. This material was used without further purification.
To a solution of MD 1-2 (0.22 g) in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) at 0° C. was added TFA (0.6 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0° C. and at rt for 30 min whereupon an additional portion of TFA (0.4 mL) was added. After an additional 1 h at rt, the mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The crude mixture was redissolved in a 10:1 mixture of toluene/CH2Cl2 and concentrated and this protocol was repeated 5 times with to afford MD1-3 (0.18 g) as a light yellow solid. This material was used without further purification.
To a solution of MD 1-3 (0.41 g) in CH2Cl2 (5 mL) at 0° C. was added 3-bis(tert-butoxycarbonylaminomethyl)-4-cyanophenylamine XX (0.42 g) followed by EDCI (0.27 g) and DMAP (13 mg). The reaction mixture was warmed to rt and stirred for 12 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc (15 mL) and the organic layer was washed with 1N HCl (2×3 mL) and brine (1×2 mL). The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (ISCO, 20 g) using a gradient of 100% CH2Cl2 to 90:10 CH2Cl2/MeOH to afford MD 1-4 (0.35 g) as a white solid.
To a solution of the MD 1-4 (0.35 g) in MeOH (0.5 mL) at rt was added 7M NH3/MeOH (2.5 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 45 min at rt and the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and placed under high vacuum. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (ISCO, 12 g) using a gradient of 100% CH2Cl2 to 90:10 CH2Cl2/MeOH to afford MD 1-5 (0.26 g) as a white solid.
To a flask containing MD 1-5 (0.26 g) and a stir bar was added 4N HCl in dioxane (4 mL) at rt. The mixture was stirred for 1.5 h and was concentrated to ˜2 mL. Toluene (8 mL) was added and the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was treated with toluene (2×8 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was taken up in EtOH (8 mL) and was heated at reflux for 12 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, concentrated under reduced pressure, and placed under high vacuum. The crude residue was treated with MeOH followed by dilution with Et2O and the resultant solid was collected by filtration and dried under vacuum to afford Example aa117 (106 mg) hydrochloride as a white solid.
To a mixture of 2,3-dihydro-5-iodo-1H-isoindol-1-one (1.0 g) in DMF (20 mL) at 0° C. was added NaH (97 mg) in a single portion. The resulting mixture was stirred for 30 min at 0° C. whereupon MeI (0.25 mL) was added dropwise. The mixture was allowed to warm to rt and was stirred for 72 h. The mixture was quenched by addition of sat. aq. NH4Cl (˜3 mL) and was diluted with EtOAc (10 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layers were combined and washed sequentially with water and brine. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (ISCO, 120 g) using a gradient of 100% hexanes to 80:20 hexanes/EtOAc to afford MD 2-1 (0.78 g) as a light yellow solid.
According to the Step MD 1-1 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 2-1 (0.20 g) was used instead of MD 1-1 to obtain MD 2-2 (0.29 g) as an off-white solid.
According to the Step MD 1-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 2-2 (0.29 g) was used instead of MD 1-1 to obtain MD 2-3 (0.31 g) as an off-white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 2-3 (0.31 g) was used instead of MD 1-2 to obtain MD 2-4 (0.27 g) as a white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 2-4 (0.11 g) was used instead of MD 1-3 to obtain MD 2-5 (0.14 g) as an off-white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 2-5 (0.14 g) was used instead of MD 1-4 to obtain MD 2-6 (0.13 mg) as a off-white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 2-5 (0.13 g) was used instead of MD 1-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa118 (25 mg) as a pale white solid as the hydrochloride salt after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H and treatment with HCl.
To a mixture of 2,3-dihydro-6-iodo-1H-isoindol-1-one (1.0 g) in DMF (20 mL) at 0° C. was added NaH (97 mg) in a single portion. The resulting mixture was stirred for 30 min at 0° C. whereupon MeI (0.25 mL) was added dropwise. The mixture was allowed to warm to rt and was stirred for 72 h. The mixture was quenched by addition of sat. aq. NH4Cl (˜3 mL) and was diluted with EtOAc (10 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layers were combined and washed sequentially with water and brine. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (ISCO, 120 g) using a gradient of 100% hexanes to 80:20 hexanes/EtOAc to afford MD 3-1 (0.84 g) as a yellow solid.
To a round bottom flask charged with a stir bar was added AMRI 1-1 (0.28 g) and MD 11-1 (0.40 g) in DMSO (8 mL) at rt was added K3PO4 (0.51 g), and CuI (23 mg) under N2. trans-N,N′-Dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (37 μL) was added dropwise and the mixture was affixed with a condenser. The mixture was degassed under vacuum (˜20 mm), filled with N2, and heated to 80° C. The mixture stirred for 2.5 h at 80° C., cooled to rt, and was diluted with EtOAc. The mixture was then sequentially washed with conc NH4OH, water, and brine. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford a yellow oil. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using a gradient of 100% CH2Cl2 to 60% CH2Cl2/40% MeOH to afford MD3-2 (0.23 g) as a yellow solid.
According to the Step MD 1-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 3-2 (80 mg) was used instead of MD 1-1 to obtain MD 3-3 (85 mg) as an off-white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 3-3 (85 mg) was used instead of MD 1-2 to obtain MD 3-4 (65 mg) as a light yellow semisolid solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 3-4 (0.25 g) was used instead of MD 1-3 to in the presence of aniline XX (0.29 g) obtain MD 3-5 (0.23 g) as a pale yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 3-5 (0.23 g) was used instead of MD 1-4 to obtain MD 3-6 (0.16 g) as a white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 3-6 (0.16 g) was used instead of MD 1-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa119 (0.11 g) as a white solid as the hydrochloride salt after HCl treatment.
According to the Step MD 1-1 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, AMRI 1-1 (0.35 g) was treated with ethyl 2-(3-iodophenoxy)acetate (0.56 g) from Eur J. Org. Chem. 2008, 337 to obtain MD 4-1 (0.54 g) as an yellow solid after flash chromatography with 40:1 CH2Cl2/MeOH as eluent.
According to the Step MD 1-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 4-1 (0.54 g) was used instead of MD 1-1 to obtain MD 4-2 (0.56 g) as a yellow oil which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 9-2 (0.55 g) was used instead of MD 1-2 to obtain MD 4-3 (0.45 g) as a yellow solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 4-3 (0.38 g) was used instead of MD 1-3 to obtain MD 3-4 (0.26 g) after flash chromatography using a gradient of 100% hexanes to 100% EtOAc.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117 except using 2M NH3 in EtOH, compound MD 4-4 (0.26 g) was used instead of MD 1-4 to obtain MD 5-5 (0.21 g) as an off-white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117 except substituting EtOH for MeOH as solvent, compound MD 4-5 (0.20 g) was used instead of MD 1-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa120 (81 mg) as the hydrochloride salt after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H and subsequent treatment with HCl.
According to the Step MD 1-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound AMRI 2-1 (0.35 g) was used instead of MD 1-1 to obtain MD 5-1 (0.37 g) as a yellow oil which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 5-1 (0.37 g) was used instead of MD 1-2 to obtain MD 5-2 (0.32 g) as a yellow solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 5-2 (0.25 g) was used instead of MD 1-3 to obtain MD 5-3 (0.24 g) of a white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 5-3 (0.24 g) was used instead of MD 1-4 to obtain MD 5-4 (0.23 g) as an off-white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 5-4 (0.23 g) was used instead of MD 1-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa121 (0.15 g) as a pale yellow solid as the hydrochloride salt.
This Example is intentionally left blank.
According to the Step MD 1-1 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, AMRI 1-1 (0.50 g) was treated with 1-benzyloxy-3-iodobenzene (0.81 g) to obtain MD 7-1 (0.71 g) as a clear oil after flash chromatography with 50:1 CH2Cl2/MeOH as eluent.
According to the Step MD 1-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 7-1 (0.71 g) was used instead of MD 1-1 to obtain MD 7-2 (0.78 g) as a yellow oil which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 7-2 (0.78 g) was used instead of MD 1-2 to obtain MD 7-3 (0.68 g) as a yellow solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 7-3 (0.68 g) was used instead of MD 1-3 to obtain MD 7-4 (0.20 g) of an off-white solid after flash chromatography with a gradient of 100% hexanes to 50:50 hexanes/EtOAc.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 7-4 (0.20 g) was used instead of MD 1-4 to obtain MD 7-5 (0.16 g) as an off-white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 7-5 (0.16 g) was used instead of MD 1-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa123 (86 mg) as the hydrochloride salt.
According to the Step MD 3-1 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 3, 2,3-dihydro-6-iodo-1H-isoindol-1-one (0.50 g) was treated with cyclopropyl bromide (0.20 mL) to afford MD 8-1 (0.22 g) of a yellow solid after purification by flash chromatography (ISCO, 120 g) using a gradient of 100% hexanes to 40:60 hexanes/EtOAc.
According to the Step MD 1-1 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, AMRI 1-1 (0.14 g) was treated with MD 8-1 (0.22 g) to obtain MD 8-2 (0.22 g) as a white solid after flash chromatography with 50:1 CH2Cl2/MeOH as eluent.
According to the Step MD 1-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 8-2 (0.22 g) was used instead of MD 1-1 to obtain MD 8-3 (0.24 g) as an off-white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 8-3 (0.24 g) was used instead of MD 1-2 to obtain MD 8-4 (0.22 g) as a light yellow semisolid solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 8-4 (0.22 g) was used instead of MD 1-3 to in the presence of aniline XX (0.22 g) obtain MD 8-5 (0.25 g) as a pale yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 8-5 (0.25 g) was used instead of MD 1-4 to obtain MD 8-6 (0.18 g) as a white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 8-6 (0.18 g) was used instead of MD 1-5 to obtain EXAMPLE aa124 (78 mg) as a white solid as the hydrochloride salt after HCl treatment.
To a solution of t-BuOK (1.3 g) in THF (15 mL) at rt was added 2-(3-iodophenylamino)ethanol MD 9-1 (3.0 g) prepared from US 2004/0167188 followed by ethyl chloroacetate (1.1 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred for 12 h at rt whereupon an additional portion of t-BuOK (0.6 g) and ethyl chloroacetate (0.5 mL) was added. The mixture was heated to 55° C., stirred for 12 h, and was cooled to rt. The mixture was treated with sat. aq NaHCO3 and water and was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layers were combined, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography using a gradient of 100% hexanes to 20% hexanes/80% EtOAc to afford MD 9-2 (1.5 g) of the title compound as a light yellow solid.
According to the Step MD 1-1 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 9-2 (0.72 g) was used in the presence of AMRI 1-1 (0.50 g) to obtain MD 9-3 (0.65 g) as yellow crystalline solid after flash chromatography using a 20:1 mixture of CH2Cl2/MeOH.
According to the Step MD 1-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 9-3 (0.65 g) was used instead of MD 1-1 to obtain MD 9-4 (0.72 g) as an off-white solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 9-4 (0.72 g) was used instead of MD 1-2 to obtain MD 9-5 (0.60 g) as a light yellow solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 4-5 (70 mg) was treated with tert-butyl-4-amino-2-fluorobenzylcarbamate (65 mg) to afford MD 9-6 (0.10 g) as a pale yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 9-6 (0.10 g) was used instead of compound MD 1-4 to obtain MD 9-7 (90 mg) as a white solid. Crude MD 9-7 was used without further purification in the next step.
To a solution of MD 9-7 (90 mg) in CH2Cl2 (5 mL) at 0° C. was added TFA (1.5 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 3 h at 0° C. and concentrated to dryness and this protocol was repeated 5 times. The crude mixture was taken up in MeOH and treated with 1M HCl in Et2O to afford after filtration EXAMPLE aa125 (45 mg) as a pale yellow solid.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 9-5 (70 mg) was treated with N-(4-aminophenyl)guanidine (41 mg) to afford MD 10-1 (65 mg) as a pale yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 10-1 (60 mg) was used instead of compound MD 1-4 to obtain EXAMPLE aa126 (35 mg) as a yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
To a solution of 3-iodo-6-fluorobenzoic acid (5.0 g) in DMF (50 mL) at rt was added morpholine (1.8 mL), HATU (8.6 g), and DIPEA (9.8 mL). The mixture was stirred for 12 h at rt whereupon the mixture was diluted with EtOAc. The organic layers were washed with 1N NaOH, 1M HCl, water, and brine. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography using a gradient of 100% CH2Cl2 to 97.5% CH2Cl2/2.5% MeOH to afford MD 11-1 (5.2 g) of the title compound as a brown solid.
According to the Step MD 1-1 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 11-1 (0.87 g) was used in the presence of AMRI 1-1 (0.50 g) to obtain MD 11-2 (0.64 g) as yellow semisolid after flash chromatography using a 50:1 mixture of CH2Cl2/MeOH.
According to the Step MD 1-2 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 11-2 (0.64 g) was used instead of MD 1-1 to obtain MD 11-3 (0.71 g) as an light yellow oil which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-3 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, compound MD 11-3 (0.71 g) was used instead of MD 1-2 to obtain MD 11-4 (0.60 g) as a light yellow solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 11-4 (0.62 g) was treated with tert-butyl-4-aminobenzylcarbamate (0.48 g) to afford MD 11-5 (0.71 g) as a pale yellow solid after flash chromatography using a 50:1 mixture of CH2Cl2/MeOH.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 11-5 (0.71 g) was used instead of compound MD 1-4 to obtain MD 11-6 (0.66 g) as a white solid. Crude MD 9-7 was used without further purification in the next step.
According to the Step MD 9-8 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa125, MD 11-6 (0.66 g) was used instead of compound MD 9-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa127 (0.21 g) as a pale yellow hydrochloride salt upon treatment with HCl.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 11-4 (0.10 g) was treated with 4-aminobenzamide (49 mg) to afford MD 12-1 (60 mg) as a yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 12-1 (60 mg) was used instead of compound MD 1-4 to obtain EXAMPLE aa128 (31 mg) as a pale white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 11-4 (0.10 g) was treated with tert-butyl 6-amino-3,4-dihydroisoquinoline-2(1H)-carboxylate (89 mg) to afford MD 13-1 (0.10 g) as a yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 13-1 (0.10 g) was used instead of compound MD 1-4 to obtain MD 13-2 (94 mg) as a pale yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 9-8 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa125, MD 13-2 (94 mg) was used instead of compound MD 9-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa129 (90 mg) as a pale yellow solid after treatment with HCl.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 11-4 (0.10 g) was treated with tert-butyl-4-amino-2-fluorobenzylcarbamate (86 mg) to afford MD 14-1 (0.13 g) as an off-white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 14-1 (0.13 g) was used instead of compound MD 1-4 to obtain MD 14-2 (90 mg) as a pale yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 9-8 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa125, MD 14-2 (90 mg) was used instead of compound MD 9-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa130 (95 mg) as a pale yellow solid after treatment with HCl.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 11-4 (0.10 g) was treated with (R)-[1-(4-amino-phenyl)-ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (85 mg) to afford MD 15-1 (0.12 g) as an off-white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 15-1 (0.12 g) was used instead of compound MD 1-4 to obtain MD 15-2 (80 mg) as a pale yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 9-8 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa125, MD 15-3 (90 mg) was used instead of compound MD 9-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa131 (80 mg) as a pale yellow solid after treatment with HCl.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 11-4 (0.23 g) was treated with di-tert-butyl(6-aminoisoquinolin-1-yl)imidocarbonate (0.25 g) from WO 2006/062972 to afford MD 16-1 (0.29 g) as an yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 16-1 (0.29 g) was used instead of compound MD 1-4 to obtain MD 16-2 (0.27 g) as maize solid which was used without further purification.
According to the Step MD 9-8 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa125, MD 16-3 (0.27 g) was used instead of compound MD 9-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa132 (0.11 g) as a pale yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:TFA to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:TFA to afford the trifluoroacetate salt.
To a solution of (1R)-indane-1,5-amine hydrochloride (0.60 g) in CH2Cl2 (16 mL) at 0° C. was added Et3N (1.4 mL) followed by Boc2O (0.85 g). The mixture was allowed to warm to rt and was stirred for 12 h. The mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 (5 mL) and sat. aq. NaHCO3 (3 mL) and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2Cl2 (2×5 mL) and the organic layers were combined. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography using a gradient of 100% hexanes to 20% hexanes/80% EtOAc to afford MD 17-1 (0.26 g) as a yellow/orange semisolid.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 17-1 (0.11 g) was treated with MD 11-4 (0.15 g) to afford MD 17-2 (0.21 g) as a white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 17-2 (0.21 g) was used instead of compound MD 1-4 to obtain MD 17-2 (0.14 g) as a white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 9-8 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa125, MD 17-3 (0.14 g) was used instead of compound MD 9-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa133 (38 mg) as a clear glass after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:TFA to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:TFA to afford the trifluoroacetate salt.
According to the Step MD 17-1 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa133, (1S)-indane-1,5-amine hydrochloride (0.72 g) was used to produce MD 18-1 (0.40 g) as a yellow semisolid.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 18-1 (0.11 g) was treated with MD 11-4 (0.15 g) to afford MD 17-2 (0.24 g) as a white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 18-2 (0.24 g) was used instead of compound MD 1-4 to obtain MD 18-3 (0.18 g) as a white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 9-8 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa125, MD 18-3 (0.14 g) was used instead of compound MD 9-7 to obtain EXAMPLE aa134 (56 mg) as a clear glass after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:TFA to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:TFA to afford the trifluoroacetate salt.
To a solution of 6-nitroquinoline-2-amine (1.0 g) in THF (30 mL) was added Boc2O (2.9 g) and DMAP (32 mg). The mixture was heated at reflux for 12 h whereupon an additional portion of Boc2O (0.7 g) and DMAP (60 mg) were added. The mixture was stirred at reflux for an additional 12 h whereupon the mixture was cooled and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resultant solid was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (50 mL) and was washed with sat. aq. NH4Cl (1×15 mL) and sat. aq. NaHCO3 (1×15 mL). The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography using a gradient of 100% hexanes to 50% hexanes/50% EtOAc to afford MD 19-1 (2.1 g) as a white solid.
To a heterogenous mixture of MD 19-1 (2.0 g) in MeOH/THF (12 mL/12 mL) was added 10% Pd/C (100 mg). The mixture was stirred under a H2 balloon for 12 h whereupon the mixture was purged to N2. The mixture was filtered thru a pad of Celite and the pad was generously washed with MeOH (5×10 mL). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and placed under high vacuum to afford MD 19-2 (1.7 g) as a light yellow solid.
According to the Step MD 1-4 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 11-4 (0.15 g) was treated with MD 19-2 (0.17 g) to afford MD 19-3 (0.13 g) as an yellow solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 1-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa117, MD 19-3 (0.13 g) was used instead of compound MD 1-4 to obtain MD 19-4 (0.10 g) as white solid after reverse phase HPLC purification using a C18 column and a gradient of 89.95:9.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H to 9.95:89.95:0.1 H2O:MeCN:HCO2H.
According to the Step MD 9-8 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa125, MD 19-4 (0.10 g) was used instead of compound MD 9-7 using 4N HCl in dioxane obtain EXAMPLE aa135 (85 mg) as a yellow solid after treatment with HCl.
A mixture of MCH1-1 (3.9 g, 14.03 mmol (prepared according to the procedure described in WO 2006/021457 A2)), CuCN (6.3 g, 70.34 mmol, 5 eq.) in 40 mL DMF was degassed under vacuum, filled with argon atmosphere and heated in an oil bath at ˜160° C. (bath temp.) for 20 min. It was removed from the bath, cooled to rt then diluted with ethyl acetate while being stirred vigorously. The mixture was filtered through a pad of CELITE, rinsed with ethyl acetate and the filtrate was washed with water and brine. It was dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness to give 3.02 g of MCH1-2 as solid.
A suspension of 3 (500 mg) and 10% Pd/C (50 mg) in 10 mL of 1:1 THF-EtOH was under overnight under a hydrogen balloon. It was filtered through a CELITE pad and evaporated to dryness to give 435 mg of aniline.
To a solution of the above aniline (430 mg, 2.22 mmol) and NaHCO3 (930 mg, 11.07 mmol, 5 eq.) in 10 mL THF at rt was added benzylchloroformate (0.95 mL, 0.66 mmol, 3 eq.). The mixture was stirred overnight at rt, diluted with water and extracted 3× with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to a small volume to give a suspension. The suspension was diluted with ether and the solid was filtered, washed with ether and dried to give 485 mg MCH1-3.
To a solution of MCH1-3 (650 mg, 1.98 mmol), LiOH.H2O (330 mg, 5.96 mmol, 3 eq.) in 10 mL THF and 2 mL water was stirred at rt for 45 min. and diluted with water. The solution was acidified with 1N HCl to ˜pH 1 and extracted 3× with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness to give 620 g of the acid.
To a solution of the above acid (620 mg, 1.97 mmol) and triethyl amine (0.55 mL, 3.95 mmol, 2 eq.) in 10 mL THF at ˜−20° C. was added a 1M solution of isopropylchlroformate in toluene (2.4 mL, 2.4 mmol, 1.2 eq.). The mixture was stirred for about 10 min and filtered through a fritted funnel and the precipitate rinsed with 10 mL THF. The filtrate was cooled to ˜−20° C. and a solution of sodium borohydride (375 mmol, 9.91 mmol, 5 eq.) in 2 mL water was added. After being stirred for 10 min. at −20° C., the reaction mixture was diluted with water and extracted 3× with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers was washed aq. NH4Cl solution followed by brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness to provide the crude alcohol.
The above alcohol was dissolved in 10 mL of dichloromethane and cooled to 0° C. To this was added triethyl amine (0.55 mL, 3.95 mmol, 2 eq) followed by methane sulfonylchloride (0.185 mL, 2.39 mmol, 1.2 eq.). The mixture was stirred for 1 hr, diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with 1N HCl, 2× with aq. NaHCO3 and brine. It was dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to provide the crude mesylate which was used for the subsequent step.
A solution of the above mesylate, di-tert-butyl iminodicarboxylate (560 mg, 2.58 mmol, 1.3 eq.), K2CO3 (540 mg, 3.97 mmol), and tetrabutylammonium iodide (973 mg, 0.198 mmol, 0.1 eq) in 10 mL DMF was stirred overnight at rt. The mixture was diluted with water, extracted 3× with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by chromatography eluting with 0% to 20% ethyl acetate in hexane to provide 49 mg of MCH1-5.
A suspension of 5 (180 mg), 10% Pd—C (30 mg) in 2 mL THF and 2 mL ethanol was stirred under a hydrogen balloon for 6 hr, filtered through a CELITE pad, concentrated and purified by chromatography eluting with 100% hexane to 1:1:3 ethyl acetate/dichloromethane/hexane to provide 50 mg of MCH1-6.
Compound MCH1-6 was converted to example aa136 using a procedure similar to the preparation of Example 57.
To a solution of MCH2-1 (950 mg, 2.73 mmol) in 10 ml isopropanol at 60° C. was added N-chlorosuccinimide (400 mg, 2.99 mmol, 1.1 eq). The mixture was heated at reflux for 1.5 hr, left overnight at rt, concentrated and diluted with ethyl acetate. The solution was washed 2× with water, brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography using 40% ethyl acetate in hexanes to provide 288 mg of MCH2-2.
Compound MCH2-2 was converted to example aa137 using procedure similar to the preparation of Example 57.
The following analogs were prepared using analogous procedure:
Example aa147 was prepared using procedures similar to the preparation of Example 73.
Example aa148 was prepared using procedures similar to the preparation of example 98.
To a solution of commercially available 2,2,2-trifluoro-1-(2-fluoro-5-iodophenyl)ethanone (2 g, 6.29 mmol) in 20 mL dichloromethane at rt was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (3.3 mL, 18.95 mmol, 3 eq.) followed by 1M solution of TiCl4 in dichloromethane (6.3 mL, 6.3 mmol, 1 eq.). The mixture was stirred at rt for 3 days, added 10 mL of methanol followed by NaCNBH3 (3.2 g) and trifluoroacetic acid (4.7 mL). The mixture was stirred overnight at rt, poured into aq. NaHCO3 and extracted 3× with dichloromethane. The combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by chromatography eluting with 0% to 20% ethyl acetate in hexane to provide 1.16 g of MCH14-1.
Compound MCH14-1 was converted to example aa149 using experimental procedure similar to the one described for the preparation of aa95
The following examples were prepared using analogous procedure:
To a solution of 4-amino-2,5-difluorobenzonitrile (10 g, 64.88 mmol) di-tert-butyldicarbonate (43 g, 197 mmol, 3 eq.) in dichloromethane at rt was added DMAP (1.6 g, 13.10 mmol, 0.2 eq.) and triethyl amine (28 mL, 200 mmol, 3 eq.). The mixture was stirred overnight at rt and poured into 1N HCl. The organic layer separated and the aqueous phase extracted twice with dichloromethane. The combined organic layer was washed with brined, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness to obtain 22.6 g of the protected aniline.
To a solution of the above aniline (12.6 g, 36 mmol) acetohydroxamic acid (16 g, 213 mmol, 6 eq.) and K2CO3 (58 g, 0.426 mmol, 12 eq.) in 150 mL of 9:1 DMF-water was heated overnight in an oil bath kept ˜60° C. It was poured into water, extracted 3× with ethyl acetate, the combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by chromatography eluting with 0% to 50% ethyl acetate in hexane to provide 5.76 g of MCH17-1 contaminated with an unknown byproduct.
To a solution of MCH17-1 (520 mg), triethyl amine (0.82 mL) and DMAP (24 mg) in 10 mL dichloromethane at 0° C. was added phthaloyl chloride (0.36 mL). The mixture was stirred overnight at rt, diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with 1N HCl, aq. NaHCO3 and brine. It was dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by chromatography eluting with 0% to 50% ethyl acetate in hexane to provide 338 mg of phthalimide protected intermediate which was stirred with 5 mL of trifluoroacetic acid at rt for 40 min. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness, the residue was suspended in aq. NaHCO3 and extracted 3× with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness to obtain 220 mg MCH 17-2.
Compound MCH17-2 was converted to aa152 using a procedure similar to the preparation of aa149
To 1.7 g of 6-nitroquinazolin-2-amine (prepared according the procedure described in WO 2006/039718) in 45 mL of dry dichloromethane at room temperature was added 6.2 mL of triethylamine, 5.85 g of di-tert-butyldicarbonate, and 110 mg of DMAP and the mixture was stirred under nitrogen overnight. The reaction mixture was washed with water, aq. sodium bicarbonate and brine then dried with magnesium sulfate, filtered and evaporated to dryness. Purification by flash chromatography yielded 3.04 g of the protected aniline.
To 0.5 g of the above product in 20 mL of methanol was added 50 mg of 10% palladium on carbon and the mixture was shaken under 40 psi of hydrogen for 45 minutes. The mixture was filtered and evaporated to dryness. Recrystallization from ethyl acetate/hexanes yielded 220 mg of MCH18-1.
Compound MCH18-1 was converted to aa153 using a procedure similar to the preparation of Example 98.
To a mixture of 2-bromo-4-fluorophenol (1.3 g, 7.0 mmol) and potassium carbonate (2.0 g, 14 mmol) in DMF (15 mL), 2-iodopropane (1.8 g, 10.5 mmol) was added. The mixture was heated to 55° C. and stirred for 16 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and diluted with diethyl ether. The organics were washed with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride, water, and dried with Na2SO4. The organics were evaporated to dryness to give Compound aa154-2 (1.4 g, 86%) which was used without further purification in the next step.
To a nitrogen purged vessel, a solution of compound aa154-2 (1.4 g, 6.0 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (6 mL), sodium iodide (1.8 g, 12.0 mmol), copper iodide (0.057 g, 0.3 mmol), and trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (0.085 g, 0.6 mmol) were added. The vessel was sealed and heated to 110° C. for 16 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, washed with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride, and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organics were dried with Na2SO4 and evaporated to dryness to give Compound aa154-3 (1.4 g, 83%) which was used without further purification in the next step.
To a nitrogen purged vessel, a solution of compound aa154-3 (1.4 g, 5.0 mmol) in DMSO (40 mL), (R)-tert-butyl 2-hydroxy-2-((R)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)acetate (0.96 g, 4.1 mmol), potassium phosphate (1.75 g, 8.2 mmol), copper iodide (0.157 g, 0.82 mmol), and trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (0.116 g, 0.82 mmol) were added. The vessel was sealed and heated to 85° C. for 3 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, washed with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride, and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organics were dried with Na2SO4 and evaporated to dryness. The crude material was purified by silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/Hexanes 0 to 45%) to give Compound aa154-4 (1.2 g, 76%).
To a solution of compound aa154-4 (1.2 g, 3.1 mmol) in DCM (30 mL) that was chilled to 0° C. was added DMAP (0.038 g, 0.31 mmol), pyridine (0.49 g, 6.2 mmol), and acetic anhydride (0.64 g, 6.2 mmol). The reaction was stirred at 0° C. for 3 h. The reaction was diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with aqueous Cu2SO4 and H20 (×3). The organics were dried with Na2SO4 and evaporated to dryness. The crude material was purified by silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/Hexanes 0 to 45%) to give Compound aa154-5 (0.9 g, 68%).
Compound aa154-5 was dissolved in DCM (20 mL), TFA (10 mL) and H2O (0.1 mL). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The reaction was evaporated to dryness. The residue was dissolved in 50 mL of toluene and evaporated to dryness (×3). The residue was dissolved in 50 mL of hexanes and evaporated to dryness (×2) to give Compound aa154-6 (0.8 g, 100%) which was used without further purification in the next step.
According to the step 70-5 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, compound aa154-6 (0.6 g, 1.6 mmol) was used instead of compound 70-4 to couple to compound aa154a (0.55 g, 1.6 mmol) instead of compound 68-12 to obtain compound aa154-7 (0.16 g, 14%) after chromatography purification on silica gel eluting with DCM/Ethyl Acetate (90/10).
According to the step 70-6 in the synthetic method for EXAMPLE 70, compound aa154-7 (0.16 g, 0.23 mmol) was used instead of compound 70-5. The crude reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness and dissolved in 4N HCl in dioxane (3 mL). The reaction was stirred at ambient temperature for two h. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness to give compound aa154-8 (0.1 g, 95%) which was used without further purification in the next step.
Compound aa154-8 was dissolved in ethanol (5 mL) and heated to 85° C. for 16 h. The reaction was cooled to ambient temperature, evaporated to dryness, and purified by HPLC. The resulting fraction was purified by silica gel chromatography and eluted with DCM/(7N NH3 in MeOH) (90/10) to obtain compound aa154 ((R)-2-((R)-4-(5-fluoro-2-isopropoxyphenyl)-3-oxomorpholin-2-yl)-2-hydroxy-N-(1-iminoisoindolin-5-yl)acetamide) (0.002 g, 2%).
Compound was obtained using the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa154 beginning from Step 3 using 1-iodo-2-(trifluoromethyl)benzene instead of compound aa154-3.
Compound was obtained using the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa154 beginning from Step 3 using 1-(difluoromethoxy)-2-iodobenzene instead of compound aa154-3.
Compound was obtained using the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa154 using with 2-iodophenol instead of 2-bromo-4-fluorophenol in Step 1. Step 2 was skipped.
Compound was obtained using the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa154 using 2-bromo-4-chlorophenol instead of 2-bromo-4-fluorophenol in Step 1.
Compound was obtained using the synthetic method for EXAMPLE aa154 beginning from Step 3 using 1-iodo-2-(trifluoromethoxy)benzene instead of compound aa154-3.
1H NMR (400 MHz)
To a cooled solution of 2-fluoro-5-iodophenylboronic acid (5.0 g, 18.81 mmol) in THF (200 mL) at 0° C. was added an aqueous solution of 30% H2O2 (1.73 mL, 18.0 mmol) dropwise and stirred for 10 min. This was followed by the addition of an aqueous solution of 4N NaOH (0.3 mL, 1.2 mmol). The reaction was then warmed to rt and stirred overnight. MnO2 (40.0 mg) was then added to the reaction mixture and stirred for 90 min. The reaction mixture was then filtered and concentrated and partitioned between diethyl ether (150 mL) and water (150 mL). Separated the organics and washed further with brine and dried. The product was purified by eluting with silica-gel from 100:0 to 70:30 hexanes to ethyl acetate to give the product SN1-2 (3.4 g, 76%).
To a sealed tube was added SN1-2 (218 mg, 0.92 mmol), commercially available tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl methanesulfonate (0.2 g, 1.1 mmol), potassium carbonate (0.384 g, 2.78 mmol) in DMF (4.0 mL) and heated at 70° C. overnight. The reaction mixture was then cooled and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organics were washed multiple times with water and brine and this was followed by washing with 1M NaOH. The organic fractions were concentrated and purified over column chromatography using 25% acetone/hexanes to give product SN1-4 (120 mg, 41%). The yield of this reaction was greatly improved by heating at 100° C. for a similar substrate.
A mixture of aryl iodide SN1-4 (0.120 g, 0.37 mmol), previously described SN1-5 (0.064 g, 0.28 mmol), CuI (11 mg, 0.056 mmol), K3PO4 (119 mg, 0.56 mmol) and trans-N,N′-dimethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (9 μL, 0.056 mmol) were stirred in DMSO (4.0 mL). The degassed reaction mixture was then heated at 100° C. for 5.0 h. The reaction was then cooled, quenched with water, extracted with EtOAc and washed with brine. The organic fractions were concentrated and purified with 50-60% EtOAc/hexanes to give the product SN1-6 (0.084 mg, 71%).
The iodide SN1-6 was converted to aa160 using experimental procedure described for the preparation of aa95.
A mixture of aryl iodide SN1-2 (1.0 g, 4.2 mmol), potassium carbonate (21.0 g, 151.9 mmol), 2-chloro-2,2-difluoro-1-phenylethanone (3.9 g, 20.5 mmol) were stirred in acetonitrile/water (1:1, 50 mL) and heated in a sealed tube at 85° C. for 5.0 h. The reaction mixture was cooled and the organics were extracted thrice with ether. The ether fractions were washed with 1M NaOH and concentrated. The product was purified by column chromatography with 10-20% EtOAc/hexanes to give the product SN2-1 (0.5 g, 42%).
The iodide SN2-1 was converted to aa161 using experimental procedure similar to the preparation of aa95.
To commercially available SN3-1 (0.5 g, 1.88 mmol) was added 3,3-difluoroazetidine hydrochloride (0.244 g, 1.88 mmol), HATU (1.17 g, 3.1 mmol), NMM (1.2 mL, 11 mmol) in DMF (4.0 mL) and stirred at 0° C. The reaction was quenched with NH4Cl and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organics were washed with brine, concentrated and purified by column chromatography using 40% EtOAc/Hexanes to give the product SN3-2 (0.45 g, 70%).
The iodide SN3-2 was converted to aa162 using experimental procedure described for the preparation of aa95.
2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid (1.1 g, 4.14 mmol) was dissolved in CH3CN (20 mL) and cooled to 0° C. 4,4-Difluoropiperidine (0.6 g, 4.96 mmol) was added to the mixture followed by EDCI (0.95 g, 4.96 mmol) and DMAP (0.05 g, 0.41 mmol) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. Reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with saturated NH4Cl, water and brine respectively. Organic layer was dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered, concentrated, purified by silica gel column chromatography using (0-70) % ethyl acetate-hexanes as mobile phase and the product SN1-1 (1.15 g, 75.65%) was obtained.
The iodide SN4-2 was converted to aa163 using experimental procedure similar to the preparation of aa95.
To a solution of 2-chloro-5-iodobenzoic acid (1.0 g, 3.54 mmol) in 40 mL DMF was added diisopropylethyl amine (1.23 mL, 7.08 mmol) followed by HATU (2.02 g, 5.31 mmol). After stirring the reaction at room temperature for 10 min, N-hydroxy-2,2-dimethylpropanimidamide (0.82 g, 7.08 mmol) was added. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h and then at 110° C. for 16 h. After cooling to room temperature the reaction was quenched with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic fractions were washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography (2-5% EtOAc in hexanes) to yield 660 mg of intermediate US1-2.
Intermediate US1-2 was converted to Example aa164 using previously described procedures.
Example aa165 was prepared starting from 1-fluoro-2-iodo-4-(trifluoromethyl)benzene using previously described procedures.
The invention also relates to medicaments which contain an efficacious amount of at least one compound of the Formula (I) and/or of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound of the Formula (I) and/or an optionally stereoisomeric form of the compound of the Formula (I), together with a pharmaceutically suitable and pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle, additive and/or other active substances and auxiliaries.
On account of their pharmacological properties, the compounds according to the invention are suitable, for example, for the prophylaxis, secondary prevention and therapy of all those diseases which are treatable by inhibition of blood clotting factor IXa. Thus, the compounds according to the invention are suitable as inhibitors both for prophylactic and for therapeutic administration to humans. They are suitable both for acute treatment and for long-term therapy. The compounds of the Formula (I) can be employed in patients who are suffering from disorders of well-being or diseases which accompany thromboses, embolisms, hypercoagulability or fibrotic changes.
These include myocardial infarct, angina pectoris and all other forms of acute coronary syndrome, stroke, peripheral vascular diseases, deep vein thrombosis, pulmonary embolism, embolic or thrombotic events caused by cardiac arrhythmias, cardiovascular events such as restenosis after revascularization, angioplasty and similar interventions such as stent implantations and bypass operations. Furthermore, the compounds of the Formula (I) can be employed in all interventions which lead to contact of the blood with foreign surfaces, as in dialysis patients and patients with indwelling catheters. Compounds of the Formula (I) can also be employed in order to reduce the risk of thrombosis after surgical interventions such as in knee and hip joint operations.
Compounds of the Formula (I) are suitable for the treatment of patients with disseminated intravascular coagulation, sepsis and other intravascular events which accompany inflammation. Furthermore, compounds of the Formula (I) are suitable for the prophylaxis and treatment of patients with atherosclerosis, diabetes and the metabolic syndrome and their sequelae. Disorders of the hemostatic system (for example fibrin deposits) have been implicated in mechanisms which lead to tumor growth and tumor metastasis, and in the inflammatory and degenerative joint diseases such as rheumatoid arthritis and arthrosis. Compounds of the Formula (I) are suitable for the retardation or prevention of such processes.
Further indications for the use of the compounds of the Formula (I) are fibrotic changes of the lungs such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS) and of the eye, such as fibrin deposits after eye operations. Compounds of the Formula (I) are also suitable for the prevention and/or treatment of scar formation.
The medicaments according to the invention can be administered by oral, inhalative, rectal or transdermal administration or by subcutaneous, intraarticular, intraperitoneal or intravenous injection. Oral administration is preferred. Coating of stents with compounds of the Formula (I) and other surfaces which come into contact with blood in the body is possible.
The invention also relates to a process for the production of a medicament, which comprises bringing at least one compound of the Formula (I) into a suitable administration form using a pharmaceutically suitable and pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and optionally further suitable active substances, additives or auxiliaries.
Suitable solid or galenical preparation forms are, for example, granules, powders, coated tablets, tablets, (micro)capsules, suppositories, syrups, juices, suspensions, emulsions, drops or injectable solutions and preparations having prolonged release of active substance, in whose preparation customary excipients such as vehicles, disintegrants, binders, coating agents, swelling agents, glidants or lubricants, flavorings, sweeteners and solubilizers are used. Frequently used auxiliaries which may be mentioned are magnesium carbonate, titanium dioxide, lactose, mannitol and other sugars, talc, lactose, gelatin, starch, cellulose and its derivatives, animal and plant oils such as cod liver oil, sunflower, peanut or sesame oil, polyethylene glycol and solvents such as, for example, sterile water and mono- or polyhydric alcohols such as glycerol.
Preferably, the pharmaceutical preparations are prepared and administered in dose units, where each unit contains as active constituent a certain dose of the compound of the Formula (I) according to the invention. In the case of solid dose units such as tablets, capsules, coated tablets or suppositories, this dose can be approximately 1000 mg, but preferably approximately 50 to 300 mg and in the case of injection solutions in ampoule form approximately 300 mg, but preferably approximately 10 to 100 mg.
For the treatment of an adult patient weighing approximately 70 kg, depending on the efficacy of the compound according to Formula (I), daily doses of approximately 2 mg to 1000 mg of active substance, preferably approximately 50 mg to 500 mg, are indicated. Under certain circumstances, however, higher or lower daily doses may also be appropriate. The daily dose can be administered both by single administration in the form of an individual dose unit or else of a number of smaller dose units and by multiple administration of subdivided doses at certain intervals.
Compounds of the Formula (I) can be administered both as a monotherapy and in combination or together with all antithrombotics (anticoagulants and platelet aggregation inhibitors), thrombolytics (plasminogen activators of any type), other profibrinolytically active substances, hypotensives, blood sugar regulators, lipid-lowering agents and antiarrhythmics.
The inhibitory effectiveness of compounds of the present invention to the coagulation factors XIa, VIIa, IXa, Xa, plasma kallikrein or thrombin, can be determined using a relevant purified serine protease, respectively, and an appropriate synthetic substrate.
Inhibitory activity against factor IXa was tested using the substrate SPECTROFLUOR FIXa (american diagnostica inc.; 500 West Avenue, Stamford, Conn. 06902 USA; Pr. No. 299F) and human factor IXa (american diagnostica inc.; Pr. No. 449b). Test substances dissolved in buffer A (50 mM α,α,α-tris (hydroxymethyl)methylamine (Tris), 100 mM NaCl, 5 mM CaCl2, 15% (v/v) ethylene glycol, pH 8.0) were mixed with factor IXa (2.0 μg/ml final concentration). The enzyme reaction was started by addition of SPECTROFLUOR FIXa (100 μM final concentration). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature, the reaction was stopped by the addition of 20% (v/v) acetic acid solution, and then measured the fluorescence value (Excitation Wavelength: 355 nm, Emission Wavelength; 460 nm) in a microtiter plate reader (ARVO 1420 Multilabel Counter; PerkinElmer).
The IC50 was calculated from a dilution series of the test substance with the aid of the software, Symix Assay Explorer (Symyx Technologies, Inc.). Tables 5a and 5b show the results.
In one embodiment, the compounds of the present invention were selective factor IXa inhibitors, i.e., selective for factor IXa over other coagulation factors, such as factor Xa.
This measuring was performed as well as Factor IXa method excluding the following conditions. As substrate and enzyme, SPECTROFLUOR FXa (american diagnostica inc.; Pr. No. 222F, 100 μM final concentration) and human factor Xa (american diagnostica inc.; Pr. No. 526, 44 ng/ml final concentration) were used respectively. Test substances dissolved in buffer B (20 mM Tris, 200 mM NaCl, 2.5 mM CaCl2, pH 8.0).
Selectivity for Factor IXa activity over Factor Xa activity can be determined by the following calculation: (IC50 Factor Xa)/(IC50 Factor IXa). Similar calculations can be made for selectivity of compounds for Factor IXa compared to other coagulation factors.
These as well as other ways of minimizing contact between the components of combination products of the present invention, whether administered in a single dosage form or administered in separate forms but at the same time by the same manner, will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art, once armed with the present disclosure.
The present invention is not to be limited in scope by the specific embodiments disclosed in the examples which are intended as illustrations of a few aspects of the invention and any embodiments that are functionally equivalent are within the scope of this invention. Indeed, various modifications of the invention in addition to those shown and described herein will become apparent to those skilled in the relevant art and are intended to fall within the scope of the appended claim.
A number of references have been cited, the entire disclosures of which have been incorporated herein in their entirety.
The compounds of the present invention may also be useful as inhibitors of additional serine protease, notably human thrombin, human plasma kallikrein and human plasmin. Because of their inhibitory action, these compounds are indicated for use in the prevention or treatment of physiological reactions, as it were “Conditions” including thromboembolic disorder (arterial cardiovascular thromboembolic disorders, venous cardiovascular thromboembolic disorders, thromboembolic disorders in the chambers of the heart, unstable angina, an acute coronary syndrome, atrial fibrillation, first myocardial infarction, recurrent myocardial infarction, ischemic sudden death, transient ischemic attack, stroke, atherosclerosis, peripheral occlusive arterial disease, venous thrombosis, deep vein thrombosis, thrombophlebitis, arterial embolism, coronary arterial thrombosis, cerebral arterial thrombosis, cerebral embolism, kidney embolism, pulmonary embolism, and thrombosis resulting from (a) prosthetic valves or other implants, (b) indwelling catheters, (c) stents, (d) cardiopulmonary bypass, (e) hemodialysis, or (f) other procedures in which blood is exposed to an artificial surface that promotes thrombosis), blood coagulation, fibrinolysis, blood pressure regulation and inflammation, and wound healing catalyzed by the aforesaid class of enzymes. Specifically, the compounds have utility as drugs for the treatment of diseases arising from elevated thrombin activity of the aforementioned serine proteases, such as myocardial infarction, and as reagents used as anticoagulants in the processing of blood to plasma for diagnostic and other commercial purposes.
The compounds of the present invention can be administered alone or in combination with one or more additional therapeutic agents. These include other anti-coagulant or coagulation inhibitory agents anti-platelet or platelet inhibitory agents, anti-inflammatory agents, thrombin inhibitors, thrombolytic or fibrinolytic agents, thrombin receptor (PAR-1) antagonist, a factor VIIa inhibitor, factor VIIIa inhibitor, a factor IXa inhibitor different from the compound of claim 1, a factor Xa inhibitor, a factor XIa inhibitor, TAFI, and fibrinogen inhibitors.
The compounds are administered to a mammal in a therapeutically effective amount. By “therapeutically effective amount” it is meant an amount of a compound of the present invention that, when administered alone or in combination with an additional therapeutic agent to a mammal, is effective to treat (i.e. prevent, inhibit or ameliorate) the thromboembolic and/or inflammatory disease condition or treat the progression of the disease in a host.
The compounds of the invention are preferably administered alone to a mammal in a therapeutically effective amount. However, the compounds of the invention can also be administered in combination with an additional therapeutic agent, as define below, to a mammal in a therapeutically effective amount. When administered in a combination, the combination of compounds in preferably, but not necessarily, a synergistic combination. Synergy, as described for example by Chou and Talalay, Adv. Enzyme Regul. 1984, 22, 27-55, occurs when the effect (in this case, inhibition of the desired target) of the compounds when administered in combination is greater than the additive effect of the compounds when administered alone as a single agent. In general, a synergistic effect is most clearly demonstrated at suboptimal concentrations of the compounds. Synergy can be in terms of lower cytotoxicity, increased anticoagulant effect, or some other beneficial effect of the combination compared with the individual components.
By “administered in combination” or “combination therapy” it is meant that the compound of the present invention and one or more additional therapeutic agents are administered concurrently to the mammal being treated. When administered in combination each component may be administered at the same time or sequentially in any order at different points in time. Thus, each component may be administered separately but sufficiently closely in time so as to provide the desired therapeutic effect.
Compounds which can be administered in combination with the compounds of the present invention include, but are not limited to, anticoagulants, anti-thrombin agents, anti-platelet agents, fibrinolytics, hypolipidemic agents, antihypertensive agents, and anti-ischemic agents.
Other anticoagulant agents (or coagulation inhibitory agents) that may be used in combination with the compounds of this invention include warfarin, heparin (either unfractionated heparin or any commercially available low molecular weight heparin, for example LOVANO), aprotinin, synthetic pentasaccharide, direct acting thrombin inhibitors including hirudin and argatroban, as well as other factor VIIa inhibitor, VIIIa inhibitor, IXa inhibitor, Xa inhibitor, XIa inhibitor, thrombin inhibitor, fibrinogen inhibitors, TAFI, and known in the art. Factor IXa inhibitors different from the compounds of Formula (I) include synthetic active-site blocked competitive inhibitors, oral inhibitors and RNA aptamers. These are described in the previously cited Howard et al. reference (Howard, E L, Becker K C, Rusconi, C P, Becker R C. Factor IXa Inhibitors as Novel Anticoagulants. Arterioscler Thromb Vasc Biol. 2007; 27: 722-727.).
The term anti-platelet agents (or platelet inhibitory agents), as used herein, denotes agents that inhibit platelet function, for example, by inhibiting the aggregation, adhesion or granular secretion of platelets. Such agents include, but are not limited to, the various known non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDS) such as aspirin, ibuprofen, naproxen, sulindac, indomethacin, mefenamate, droxicam, diclofenac, sulfinpyrazone, and piroxicam, including pharmaceutically acceptable salts or prodrugs thereof. Of the NSAIDS, aspirin (acetylsalicylic acid or ASA), and piroxicam are preferred. Other suitable platelet inhibitory agents include IIb/IIIa antagonists (e.g., tirofiban, eptifibatide, and abciximab), thromboxane-A2-receptor antagonists (e.g., ifetroban), thromboxane-A2-synthetase inhibitors, phosphodiesterase-111 (PDE-III) inhibitors (e.g., dipyridamole, cilostazol), and PDE V inhibitors (such as sildenafil), and pharmaceutically acceptable salts or prodrugs thereof.
The term anti-platelet agents (or platelet inhibitory agents), as used herein, is also intended to include ADP (adenosine diphosphate) receptor antagonists, preferable antagonists of the purinergic receptors P2Y1 and P2Y12 with P2Y12 being even more preferred. Preferred P2Y12 receptor antagonists include ticlopidine and clopidogrel, including pharmaceutically acceptable salts or prodrugs thereof. Clopidogrel is an even more preferred agent. Ticlopidine and clopidogrel are also preferred compounds since they are known to be gentle on the gastro-intestinal tract in use. The compounds of the present invention may also be dosed in combination with aprotinin.
The term thrombin inhibitors (or anti-thrombin agents), as used herein, denotes inhibitors of the serine protease thrombin. By inhibiting thrombin, various thrombin-mediated processes, such as thrombin-mediated platelet activation (that is, for example, the aggregation of platelets, and/or the granular secretion of plasminogen activator inhibitor-I and/or serotonin), endothelial cell activation, inflammatory reactions, and/or fibrin formation are disrupted. A number of thrombin inhibitors are known to one of skill in the art and these inhibitors are contemplated to be used in combination with the present compounds. Such inhibitors include, but are not limited to, boroarginine derivatives, boropeptides, heparins, hirudin and argatroban, including pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs thereof. Boroarginine derivatives and boropeptiders include N-acetyl and peptide derivatives of boronic acid, such as C-terminal alpha-aminoboronic acid derivatives of lysine, ornithine, arginine, homoarginine and corresponding isothiouronium analogs thereof. The term hirudin, as used herein, includes suitable derivatives or analogs of hirudin, referred to herein as hirulogs, such as disulfatohirudin.
The term “thrombin receptor antagonists”, also known as protease activated receptor (PAR) antagonists or PAR-1 antagonists, are useful in the treatment of thrombotic, inflammatory, atherosclerotic and fibroproliferative disorders, as well as other disorders in which thrombin and its receptor play a pathological role.
Thrombin receptor antagonist peptides have been identified based on structure-activity studies involving substitutions of amino acids on thrombin receptors. In Bernatowicz et al, J. Med. Chem., vol. 39, pp. 4879-4887 (1996), tetra- and pentapeptides are disclosed as being potent thrombin receptor antagonists, for example N-trans-cinnamoyl-p-fluoroPhe-p-guanidinoPhe-Leu-Arg-NH2 and N-trans-cinnamoyl-p-fluoroPhe-p-guanidinoPhe-Leu-Arg-Arg-NH2. Peptide thrombin receptor antagonists are also disclosed in WO 94/03479, published Feb. 17, 1994.
Substituted tricyclic thrombin receptor antagonists are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,063,847, 6,326,380 and WO 01/96330 and 10/271,715.
Other thrombin receptor antagonists include those disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 71304,078; 7,235,567; 7,037,920; 6,645,987; and EP Patent Nos. EP1495018 and EP1294714.
The term thrombolytic (or fibrinolytic) agents (or thrombolytics or fibrinolytics), as used herein, denotes agents that lyse blood clots (thrombi). Such agents include tissue plasminogen activator (TPA, natural or recombinant) and modified forms thereof, anistreplase, urokinase, streptokinase, tenecteplase (TNK), lanoteplase (nPA), factor VIIa inhibitors, PAI-I inhibitors (i.e., inactivators of tissue plasminogen activator inhibitors), alpha-2-antiplasmin inhibitors, and anisoylated plasminogen streptokinase activator complexes, including pharmaceutically acceptable salts or prodrugs thereof. The term anistreplase, as used herein, refers to anisoylated plasminogen streptokinase activator complex, as described, for example, in European Patent Application No. 028,489, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated herein by reference herein. The term urokinase, as used herein, is intended to denote both dual and single chain urokinase, the latter also being referred to herein as prourokinase.
Examples of suitable anti-arrhythmic agents for use in combination with the present compounds include: Class I agents (such as propafenone); Class II agents (such as carvedilol and propranolol); Class III agents (such as sotalol, dofetilide, aminodarone, azimilide and ibutilide); Class IV agents (such as ditiazem and verapamil); K+ cannel openers such as IAch inhibitors, and IKur inhibitors (e.g., compounds such as those disclosed in WO01/40231).
The term antihypertensive agents, as used herein, include: alpha adrenergic blockers; beta adrenergic blockers; calcium channel blockers (e.g., diltiazem, verapamil nifedipine, amlodipine and mybefradil); diuretics (e.g., chlorothiazide, hydrochlorothiazide, flumethiazide, hydroflumethiazide, bendroflumethiazide, methylchlorothiazide, trichloromethiazide, polythiazide, benzthiazide, ethacrynic acid tricrynafen, chlorthalidone, furosemide, musolimine, bumetanide, triamterene, amiloride, spironolactone); rennin inhibitors; angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors (e.g., captopril, Lisinopril, fosinopril, enalapril, ceranopril, cilazopril, delapril, pentopril, quinapril, ramipril, Lisinopril); angiotensin-II-receptor antagonists (e.g., irbestatin, Losartan, valsartan); ET receptor antagonists (e.g., sitaxsentan, atrsentan and compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,612,359 and 6,043,265); Dual ET/All antagonist (e.g., compounds disclosed in WO 00/01389); neutral endopeptidase (NEP) inhibitors; vasopepsidase inhibitors (dual CCE/NEP inhibitors, e.g., omapatrilat, gemopatrilat, nitrates); and β-blockers (e.g., propranolol, nadolol, or carvedilol).
Examples of suitable cardiac glycosides for use in combination with compounds of the present invention include digitalis and ouabain.
Examples of suitable mineralocorticoid receptor antagonists for use in combination with the compounds of the present invention include spironolactone and eplirinone.
Examples of suitable cholesterol/lipid lowering agents and lipid profile therapies for use in combination with the compounds of the present invention include: HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (e.g., pravastatin, lovastatin, atrbastatin, simvastatin, fluvastatin, NK-104 (a.k.a. itavastatin, or nisvastatin or nisbastatin) and ZD-4522 (a.k.a. rosuvastatin, or atavastatin or visastatin)); squalene synthetase inhibitors; fibrates; bile acid sequestrants (such as questran); ACAT inhibitors; MTP inhibitors; lipooxygenase inhibitors; cholesterol absorption inhibitors; and cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors (e.g., CP-529414).
Examples of suitable anti-diabetic agents for use in combination with the compounds of the present invention include: biguanides (e.g., metformin); glucosidase inhibitors (e.g., acarbose); insulins (including insulin secretagogues or insulin sensitizers); meglitinides (e.g., repaglinide); sulfonylureas (e.g., glimepiride, glyburide and glipizide); biguanide/glyburide combinations (e.g., glucovance), thiozolidinediones (e.g., troglitazone, rosiglitazone and pioglitazone), PPAR-alpha agonists, PPAR-gamma agonists, PPAR alpha/gamma dual agonists, SGLT2 inhibitors, inhibitors of fatty acid binding protein (aP2) such as those disclosed in WO00/59506, glucagons-like peptide-1 (GLP-1), and dipeptidyl peptidase IV (DP4) inhibitors.
Examples of suitable anti-depressant agents for use in combination with the compounds of the present invention include nefazodone and sertraline.
Examples of suitable anti-inflammatory agents for use in combination with the compounds of the present invention include: prednisone; dexamethasone; enbrel; protein tyrosine kinase (PTK) inhibitors; cyclooxygenase inhibitors (including NSAIDs, and COX-1 and/or COX-2 inhibitors); aspirin; indomethacin; ibuprofen; piroxicam; naproxen; celecoxib; and/or rofecoxib.
Examples of suitable anti-osteoporosis agents for use in combination with the compounds of the present invention include alendronate and raloxifene.
Examples of suitable hormone replacement therapies for use in combination with the compounds of the present invention include estrogen (e.g., conjugated estrogens) and estradiol.
Examples of suitable anti-obesity agents for use in combination with the compounds of the present invention include orlistat and aP2 inhibitor (such as those disclosed in WO00/59506).
Examples of suitable anti-anxiety agents for use in combination with the compounds of the present invention include diazepam, lorazepam, buspirone, and hydroxyzine pamoate.
Examples of suitable anti-proliferative agents for use in combination with the compounds of the present invention include cyclosporine A, paclitaxel, adriamycin; epithilones, cisplatin, and carboplatin.
Examples of suitable anti-ulcer and gastroesophageal reflux disease agents for use in combination with the compounds of the present invention include famotidine, ranitidine, and omeprazole.
This application is a continuation-in-part which claims the benefit, under 35 U.S.C. 120, of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/744,736, filed on May 26, 2010, which is a U.S. National Phase application under 35 U.S.C. Section 371 of PCT/US2009/066548, filed Dec. 3, 2009, which claims priority under 35 U.S.C. 119(e) of U.S. provisional applications 61/238,455 filed Aug. 31, 2009, 61/165,214, filed Mar. 31, 2009, 61/150,955, filed Feb. 9, 2009, and 61/120,328, filed Dec. 5, 2008.
| Number | Date | Country | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 61120328 | Dec 2008 | US | |
| 61150955 | Feb 2009 | US | |
| 61165214 | Mar 2009 | US | |
| 61238455 | Aug 2009 | US |
| Number | Date | Country | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Parent | 12744736 | May 2010 | US |
| Child | 12791464 | US |
